Technology Data For Energy Plants

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 212

Generation of Electricity and District Heating, Energy

Storage and Energy Carrier Generation and Conversion

TECHNOLOGY DATA FOR


ENERGY PLANTS Maj 2012
Technology Data
for
Energy Plants

Generation of Electricity and District Heating, Energy


Storage and Energy Carrier Generation and Conversion

1
ISBNwww: 978-87-7844-931-3

2
Table of contents

Introduction ............................................................................................................................................... 5
Introduction in Danish .............................................................................................................................. 7
1. Guideline ............................................................................................................................................... 8
1.1. Introduction .................................................................................................................................... 8
1.2. Qualitative description ................................................................................................................... 8
1.3. Quantitative description ................................................................................................................. 9
1.4. Definitions .................................................................................................................................... 16
1.5. References .................................................................................................................................... 17
2. Comparison of financial key figures ................................................................................................... 18
3. Technology sheets ............................................................................................................................... 30
01 Advanced Pulverized Fuel Power Plant ............................................................................................ 31
03 Rebuilding coal power plants to biomass ......................................................................................... 38
04 Gas Turbine Single Cycle ................................................................................................................. 40
05 Gas Turbine Combined Cycle ........................................................................................................... 47
06 Gas Engines....................................................................................................................................... 52
07 CO2 Capture and Storage .................................................................................................................. 55
08 Waste-to-Energy CHP Plant ............................................................................................................. 63
09 Biomass CHP, steam turbine, medium - small ................................................................................. 67
10 Stirling engines, gasified biomass ..................................................................................................... 73
20 Wind Turbines on-shore.................................................................................................................... 76
21 Wind Turbines, Offshore .................................................................................................................. 86
22 Photovoltaic Cells, Grid-connected Systems .................................................................................... 92
23 Wave Energy ..................................................................................................................................... 97
30 Solid Oxide Fuel Cells .................................................................................................................... 101
31 Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cells.......................................................................................... 106
40 Heat Pumps ..................................................................................................................................... 111
41 Electric Boilers ................................................................................................................................ 120
42 Waste-to-Energy District Heating Plant ......................................................................................... 123
43 District Heating Boiler, Biomass Fired ........................................................................................... 127
44 District Heating Boiler, Gas Fired .................................................................................................. 133
45 Geothermal District Heating ........................................................................................................... 135
46 Solar District Heating...................................................................................................................... 143
50 Pumped Hydro Storage ................................................................................................................... 146
51 Compressed Air Energy Storage ..................................................................................................... 149
52 Batteries .......................................................................................................................................... 153
60 Seasonal Heat Storage ..................................................................................................................... 159
61 Large-scale Hot Water Tanks ......................................................................................................... 164
62 Small-scale Hot Water Tanks ......................................................................................................... 169
71 Underground Storage of Gas........................................................................................................... 172
72 Hydrogen Storage ........................................................................................................................... 176

3
80 Electrolysis ...................................................................................................................................... 179
81 Centralised Biogas Plants................................................................................................................ 185
82 Upgraded Biogas ............................................................................................................................. 192
83 Biomass Gasifier, Pre-gasifier to Boilers ........................................................................................ 198
84 Gasifier, Biomass, Updraft.............................................................................................................. 202
85 Gasifiers, Biomass, Staged Down-draft .......................................................................................... 206
Annex 1: Features of steam extraction turbines .................................................................................... 209

4
INTRODUCTION
The Danish Energy Agency and Energinet.dk, the Danish electricity transmission and system operator,
have at regular intervals published a catalogue of energy producing technologies. The previous edition
was published in June 2010. This report presents the results of the most recent update.

The primary objective of publishing a technology catalogue is to establish a uniform, commonly


accepted and up-to-date basis for energy planning activities, such as future outlooks, evaluations of
security of supply and environmental impacts, climate change evaluations, and technical and economic
analyses, e.g. on the framework conditions for the development and deployment of certain classes of
technologies.

With this scope in mind, it has not been the intention to establish a comprehensive catalogue, including
all main gasification technologies or all types of electric batteries. Only selected, representative,
technologies are included, to enable generic comparisons of e.g. thermal gasification versus
combustion of biomass and electricity storage in batteries versus hydro-pumped storage.

It has finally been the intention to offer the catalogue for the international audience, as a contribution to
similar initiatives aiming at forming a public and concerted knowledge base for international analyses
and negotiations.

A guiding principle for developing the catalogue has been to rely primarily on well-documented and
public information, secondarily on invited expert advice. Since many experts are reluctant in estimating
future quantitative performance data, the data tables are not complete, in the sense that most data tables
show several blank spaces. This approach has been chosen in order to achieve data, which to some
extent are equivalently reliable, rather than to risk a largely incoherent data set including unfounded
guesstimates.

Cross-cutting comparisons between technologies will reveal inconsistencies, e.g. that a small version of
a technology is cheaper (in €/kW) than a bigger version. This reflects diversity with several causes:

Technologies are established under different conditions. A typical example is the investment
costs of 17 off-shore wind farms being established or planned in 2009. Taking all 17 projects,
the investment cost varies from 1.9 to 20 M€/MW. The 20 M€/MW project is a demonstration
project (floating wind turbines). The second-most expensive (4.2 M€/MW) is also a
demonstration project, while the data for the two cheapest wind farms (1.9 and 2.0 M€/MW) are
considered unreliable. The remaining 13 projects, costing 2.3 – 3.8 M€/MW, have all been
considered the best choice by their respective investors. The available data does not allow
telling, whether one cost estimate is more „correct‟ than another. The weighted average is 3.14
M€/MW, differing from the arithmetic average of 3.05 M€/MW. The cost figure may thus be
stated as 3.1 M€/MW +/- 25%.
Investors have different views on economic attractiveness and different preferences. Some
decisions are not based on mere cost-benefit; e.g. some will tender for a good architect to design
their building, others will buy the cheapest building.

5
Environmental regulations vary from country to country, and the parts of the investment costs,
which are environment-related, are often not reported.
Expectations to the future development vary.
Different authors have different views on how to report technical performance and costs. E.g.
some report the nameplate electricity efficiency, while others report the average annual
efficiency. The details on how to understand the data is often not reported.
Reference documents are from different years.

The ambition of the present publication has been to reduce the level of inconsistency to a minimum
without compromising the fact that the real world is ambiguous. So, when different publications have
presented different data, the publication which appears most in compliance with other publications has
been selected as reference.

Some inconsistencies are particularly noteworthy. These are highlighted by framed text-boxes.

The current update has been developed with an unbalanced focus, i.e. most attention to technologies
which are most essential for current and short-term future analyses. Therefore, some data rely on
sources, which may be antiquated. However, since all data are referenced, differences in data quality
appear explicitly.

6
INTRODUCTION IN DANISH
Energistyrelsen og Energinet.dk udgav i juni 2010 et teknologikatalog for el- og
varmeproduktionsteknologier, ‟Technology Data for Energy Plants‟. Det nuværende katalog er en
opdateret og lettere udvidet og omstruktureret udgave af 2010-kataloget.

Et hovedformål med at opdatere teknologikataloget er at sikre et ensartet, alment accepteret og aktuelt


grundlag for planlægningsarbejdet og vurderinger af forsyningssikkerhed, beredskab, miljø og
markedsudvikling hos bl.a. det systemansvarlige selskab og Energistyrelsen. Dette omfatter for
eksempel fremskrivninger, scenarieanalyser og teknisk-økonomiske analyser.

Desuden vil teknologikataloget være et nyttigt redskab til at vurdere udviklingsmulighederne for
energisektorens mange teknologier til brug for tilrettelæggelsen af støtteprogrammer for
energiforskning og -udvikling. Tilsvarende afspejler kataloget resultaterne af den energirelaterede
forskning og udvikling. Også behovet for planlægning og vurdering af klima-projekter har aktualiseret
nødvendigheden af et opdateret databeredskab.

Teknologikataloget vil endelig kunne anvendes i såvel nordisk som internationalt perspektiv. Det vil
derudover kunne bruges som et led i en systematisk international videns-opbygning og -udveksling,
ligesom kataloget kan benyttes som dansk udspil til teknologiske forudsætninger for internationale
analyser og forhandlinger. Af disse grunde er kataloget udarbejdet på engelsk.

7
1. GUIDELINE

1.1. Introduction
This chapter serves to assist readers in understanding and assessing the presented information.

Generally, technologies described in this catalogue are mature technologies. The intention has been to
present data for proven technologies, which have been sold in more than a handful of units at market
terms. Therefore, the costs do not include the first-of-a-kind premium. There are, however, few
exceptions, e.g. CCS (carbon capture and storage), wave energy and some storage technologies. In such
cases, performance and cost data have been assessed, as if technologies were in mature conditions.

The boundary for both performance data and costing are the generation assets plus the infrastructure
required to deliver the energy to the main grid. For electricity this is the nearest land-based substation
of the transmission grid, while district heat is delivered to the nearest district heating network. In other
words, the technologies are described as they are perceived by the transmission systems receiving their
energy deliveries. So a MW of electricity is the net electricity delivered, i.e. the gross generation minus
the auxiliary electricity consumed at the plant. Hence, efficiencies are also net efficiencies.

Each technology is described by a separate technology sheet, following the format explained below.

1.2. Qualitative description


One to three pages give the key characteristics of the technology. Typical paragraphs are:

Brief technology description


Very brief description for non-engineers on how the technology works and for which purpose.

Input
The main raw materials, primarily fuels, consumed by the technology.

Output
The forms of generated energy, i.e. electricity, heat, bio-ethanol etc.

Typical capacities
The stated capacities are for a single „engine‟ (e.g. a single wind turbine or a single gas turbine), not a
power plant consisting of a multitude of „engines‟ such as a wind farm.

Regulation ability
In particular relevant for electricity generating technologies, i.e. what are the part-load characteristics
and how fast can they respond to demand changes.

8
Advantages/disadvantages
Specific advantages and disadvantages relative to equivalent technologies. Generic advantages are
ignored; e.g. renewable energy technologies mitigate climate risk and enhance security of supply.

Environment
Particular environmental characteristics are mentioned, e.g. special emissions or the main ecological
footprints.

The ecological footprints cannot be used to compare technologies. For example, photovoltaic cells have
few and small footprints, one of the major ones being radioactive waste. However, this does not mean
that there is more radioactive waste from solar electricity than coal-fired electricity. It only means that
radioactive waste is one footprint from photovoltaic cells which is more important than other footprints
from the same technology.

The energy pay back time or energy self-depreciation time may also be mentioned. This is the time
required by the technology for the production of energy equal to the amount of energy that was
consumed during the production of the technology.

Energinet.dk, DONG Energy and Vattenfall have in 2009 completed a thorough life cycle assessment
(LCA) of the Danish electricity system in 2008. This includes LCA of all pertinent electricity
generating technologies. The report can be downloaded from www.energinet.dk.

Research and development


This is a very brief listing of the most important current challenges, often from a Danish perspective.

Examples of best available technology


A brief mentioning of recent technological innovations in full-scale commercial operation.

Additional remarks

References

1.3. Quantitative description


To enable comparative analyses between different technologies it is imperative that data are actually
comparable. As an example, economic data shall be stated in the same price level. Also, it is important
to compare technologies at equal footing, e.g. either gross generation capacity or net capacity (gross
minus own consumption).

It is essential that data be given for the same years. Year 2015 is the base for the present status of the
technologies (best available technology commissioned in 2015), whereas data for expectations to future
developments are given at years 2020, 2030 and 2050.

9
Below is shown a typical datasheet, containing all parameters used to describe the specific
technologies. For several technologies, the datasheet have been adjusted to suit the specific
characteristics.

Typical datasheet:

Technology Name of technology


2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit (MW)

Electricity efficiency, net (%)


Availability (%)
Technical lifetime (years)
Construction time (years)
Environment
NOX (g per GJ fuel)
CH4 (g per GJ fuel)
N2O (g per GJ fuel)
Financial data
Nominal investment costs (M€/MW)
Fixed O&M (€/MW/year)
Variable O&M (€/MWh)

References:
1
2
Notes:
A
B

All data in the datasheets are referenced by a number in the utmost right column (Ref), referring to
source specifics below the table. The following separators are used:

; (semicolon) separation between the four time horizons (2015, 2020, 2030, and 2050)
/ (forward slash) separation between sources with different data
+ (plus) agreement between sources on same data

Before using the data please note that essential information may be found in the notes below the table.

10
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit

The capacity, preferably a typical capacity (not maximum capacity), is stated for a single „engine‟, e.g.
a single wind turbine, not a wind farm, or a single gas turbine, not a power plant consisting of multiple
gas turbines.

The capacity is given as net generation capacity in continuous operation, i.e. gross capacity (output
from generator) minus own consumption (house load), equal to capacity delivered to the grid.

The unit MW is used for electric generation capacity, whereas the unit MJ/s is used for fuel
consumption and heat generation.

Energy efficiencies

The total efficiency equals the total delivery of electricity plus heat at the fence (i.e. excluded own
consumption) divided by the fuel consumption. The efficiency is stated in per cent at ambient
conditions; air 15 oC and water 10 oC.

The electricity efficiency equals the total delivery of electricity to the grid divided by the fuel
consumption. The efficiency is stated in per cent.

The efficiencies are determined at full load (100 %), continuous operation, on an annual basis, taking
into account a typical number of start-up‟s and shut-down‟s. Some CHP plants employ cooling towers
to dismiss surplus heat during the summer. This is not included in the data.

Often, the electricity efficiency is decreasing slightly during the operating life of a thermal power plant.
This degradation is not reflected in the stated data. As a rule of thumb you may deduct 2.5 – 3.5 %
during the lifetime (e.g. from 40 % to 37 %). Specific data are given by ref. 3.

Start-up

The warm start-up time – used for boiler technologies – is defined as a start, where the water
temperature in the evaporator is above 100 oC, which means that the boiler is pressurized.

Cogeneration values

The Cb coefficient (back-pressure coefficient) is defined as the maximum power generating capacity in
back-pressure mode divided by the maximum heat capacity.

The Cv-value for an extraction steam turbine is defined as the loss of electricity production, when the
heat production is increased one unit at constant fuel input. See also Annex 1.

11
Values for Cb and Cv are given – unless otherwise stated – at 100 oC forward temperature and 50 oC
return temperature for the district heating system. For supercritical steam turbines the values should
also be given at 80/40 oC.

Average annual plant capacity factor

The average annual net generation divided by the theoretical annual net generation, if the plant were
operating at full capacity all year around. The equivalent full-load hours per year is determined by
multiplying the capacity factor by 8760 hours, the total number of hours in a year.

Forced and planned outage

Forced outage is defined as number of weighted forced outage hours divided by the sum of forced
outage hours and operation hours, multiplied by 100. The weighted forced outage hours are the hours
caused by unplanned outages, weighted according to how much capacity was out.

Forced outage is given in per cent, while planned outage is given in weeks per year.

The availability is determined as 1 minus (weighted forced outage hours + planned outage hours) /
8760; possibly in per cent.

Construction time

Period from financial closure – i.e. financing secured and all permits are at hand - until commissioning
completed (start of commercial operation).

Environment
CO2 values are not stated, as these depend on fuel, not the technology.

SOx: For technologies, where de-sulphuring equipment is employed (typically large power plants), the
degree of desulphuring (%) is stated.

The following sulphur contents of fuels can be applied:

Ori- Natural Wood-


Coal Fuel oil Gas oil Peat Straw Waste Biogas
mulsion gas fuel
Sulphur, kg/GJ 0.27 0.99 0.25 0.07 0.00 0.24 0.20 0.00 0.27 0.00

NOx: grams per GJ fuel. NOx equals NO2 + NO, where NO is converted to NO2 in weight-equivalents.

Greenhouse gasses: CH4 and N2O in grams per GJ fuel.

12
Financial data
Financial data are all in Euro (€), fixed prices, price-level 2011.
Several data originate in Danish references. For those data a fixed exchange ratio of 7.42 DKK per €
has been used.

The previous catalogue (from 2010) was in 2008 prices. Several data have been updated by applying
the general inflation rate in Denmark, so that 2008 prices been multiplied by 1.0478.

The IEA publishes at regular intervals a report on “Projected costs of generating electricity”. The latest
edition being from 2010 (ref. 4) is based on costs data for 190 power plants in 21 countries. A key
observation was that costs ”vary widely from country to country; even within the same region there are
significant variations in the cost for the same technologies… It is clearly impossible to make any
generalisation on costs above the regional level; but also within regions (OECD Europe, OECD Asia),
and even within large countries (Australia, United States, China or Russia), there are large cost
differences depending on local cost conditions (e.g. access to fossil fuels, availability of renewable
resources, different market regulations, etc.)… In particular, the cost for renewable energy
technologies shows important variations from country to country and, within each country, from
location to location”. In this perspective, the present publication has been developed with an emphasis
on European data sources.

Investment costs

The investment cost or initial cost is often reported on a normalized basis, e.g. cost per kW. The
nominal cost is the total investment cost divided by the net generating capacity, i.e. the capacity as seen
from the grid, whether electricity or district heat. For electricity generating technologies, incl.
combined heat and power generation, the denominator is electric capacity and electricity generation.

Different organizations employ different systems of accounts to specify the elements of an investment
cost estimate. As there is no universally employed nomenclature, investment costs do not always
include the same items. Actually, most reference documents do not state the exact cost elements, thus
introducing an unavoidable uncertainty that affects the validity of cost comparisons. Also, many studies
fail to report the year (price level) of a cost estimate.

In this report, the intension is that investment cost shall include all physical equipment, typically called
the engineering, procurement and construction (EPC) price or the overnight cost. Infrastructure or
connection costs, i.e. electricity, fuel and water connections, are also included.

The cost of land, the owners‟ predevelopment costs (administration, consultancy, project management,
site preparation, approvals by authorities) and interest during construction are not included. The cost to
dismantle decommissioned plants is also not included, assuming that the decommissioning costs are
offset by the residual value of the assets.

13
Costs of energy equipment surged dramatically in 2007-2008. The trend was general and global. One
example is combined cycle gas turbines (CCGT): “After a decade of cycling between $400 and $600 a
kW installed EPC prices for CCGT increased sharply in 2007 and 2008 to peak at around $1250/kW in
Q3:2008. This peak reflected tender prices: no actual transactions were done at these prices. Prices
have since fallen, with current prices now around $1050/kW” (ref. 3). Such unprecedented variations
obviously make it difficult to benchmark data from the recent five years, but a catalogue as the present
cannot be produced without using a number of different sources from different years. The reader is
urged to bear this in mind, when comparing the costs of different technologies.

The per unit cost of larger power plants are usually less than that of smaller plants. This is called the
„economy of scale‟. The proportionality was examined in some detail in the article “Economy of Scale
in Power Plants” in the August 1977 issue of Power Engineering Magazine (p. 51). The basic equation
is:

Where: C1 = Investment cost of plant 1(e.g. in million EUR)


C2 = Investment cost of plant 2
P1 = Power generation capacity of plant 1 (e.g. in MW)
P2 = Power generation capacity of plant 2
a = Proportionality factor

For many years, the proportionality factor averaged about 0.6, but extended project schedules may
cause the factor to increase. However, used with caution, this rule may be applied to convert data in
this catalogue to other plant sizes than those stated. It is important that the plants are essentially
identical in construction technique, design, and time frame and that the only significant difference is in
size.

For very large-scale plants, like coal and nuclear power plants, we may have reached a practical limit,
since very few investors are willing to add increments of 1000 MW or above. Instead, multiple unit
configurations can provide sufficient savings through allowing sharing of balance of plant equipment
and support infrastructure. Typically, about 15 % savings in investment cost per MW can be achieved
for gas combined cycle and big steam power plant from a twin unit arrangement versus a single unit
(ref. 3). The financial data in this catalogue are all for single unit plants (except for wind farms and
solar PV), so one may deduct 15 % from the investment costs, if very large plants are being considered.

The costs of grid expansion from adding a new electricity generator or a new large consumer (e.g. an
electric boiler or heat pump) to the grid are not included in the presented data. The most important
costs are to strengthen or expand the local grid and/or transformer-station. The costs vary much
depending on the type and size of generator and local conditions. For planning purposes one may apply
a generic cost of 0.13 M€ per MW the grid needs be strengthened. This is due for a single expansion. If
more generators (or consumers) are connected at the same time, the aggregate capacity addition may be
smaller than the sum of the individual expansions, since peak-loads do not occur simultaneously.

14
The specific investment of extraction steam turbine plants, which can be operated in condensation
mode, is stated as cost per MW-condensation.

A special approach has been applied for investment costs of electricity stores. Where sufficient data
have been identified, the investment cost is separated into two components:
1. The equipment, which is primarily determined by the amount of energy stored (i.e. the volume
of the cavern for compressed air energy storage, the water volume behind the dam of a pumped
hydropower plant, or the naked electric battery).
2. The equipment, which determines how much power the system can deliver (i.e. the turbine of
compressed air energy storage, the hydropower turbine, or the converter of a battery system).

To determine the total investment cost, these two components shall be added.

For example, the investment cost of a compressed air energy store may be stated as 0.2 M€/MWh plus
1.6 M€/MW. A 10 MW plant, which shall be able to discharge up to 5 hours full capacity in one
charge-discharge cycle (i.e. storage capacity 50 MWh), costs:

Operation and maintenance (O&M) costs

The fixed share of O&M (€/MW/year) includes all costs, which are independent of how the plant is
operated, e.g. administration, operational staff, planned and unplanned maintenance, payments for
O&M service agreements, network use of system charges, property tax, and insurance. Re-investments
within the scheduled lifetime are also included, whereas re-investments to extend the life are excluded.

The variable O&M costs (€/MWh) include consumption of auxiliary materials (water, lubricants, fuel
additives), treatment and disposal of residuals, output related repair and maintenance, and spare parts
(however not costs covered by guarantees and insurance).

Fuel costs are not included. Own electricity consumption is included for heat only technologies, except
for heat pumps.

It should be noticed that O&M costs often develop over time. The stated O&M costs are therefore
average costs during the entire lifetime.

The O&M costs are calculated by dividing the total annual costs, fixed and variable, with the net
generating capacity and net annual generation respectively, whether electricity or district heat. For
electricity generating technologies, incl. combined heat and power generation, the denominator is
electric capacity and electricity generation. For heat only technologies, the denominator is heat
generating capacity and heat generation.

Often, the reference documents do not distinguish between fixed and variable O&M costs. Then the
total O&M costs are given, typically in €/MWh.

15
Cost drivers
Determining the cost of energy generation is not an easy matter. Forecasting the cost is subject to even
larger bands of uncertainty. Therefore, many studies have sought to determine the most important
drivers of cost. For capital intensive technologies, such as nuclear power and most renewables, the
largest uncertainty lies with the capital expenditures, the build time and the average annual capacity
factor. For expensive fuel converters, the primary uncertainty is related to the efficiency of fuel
conversion, the price of fuel and the possible carbon penalty. A major driver in reducing prices is likely
to be increased competition from Chinese and other low cost manufacturers, compared with European,
North American and Japanese manufacturers. Mott MacDonald (ref. 3) has provided an excellent
overview of these and many other cost drivers.

The present study has not sought to develop a new understanding of cost drivers or to utilize one
particular methodology. The approach has rather been to analyse what others have forecasted and then
select the data, which appear most well-founded and most mainstream. For this reason the study has
made a virtue out of referencing information and data to the largest extent possible, allowing the reader
to make his/her own assessment.

Regulation ability
The regulation is described by three parameters:
A. Fast reserve, MW per 15 minutes.
B. Regulation speed, MW per minute.
C. Minimum load, per cent of full load.

For several technologies, these parameters do not make sense, e.g. if the technology is regulated
instantly in on/off-mode.

Parameters A and B are spinning reserves; i.e. the ability to regulate when the technology is already in
operation.

1.4. Definitions
A steam process can be of different nature:
1. Condensation: All steam flows all the way through the steam turbine and is fed into a
condenser, which is cooled by water at ambient temperature. A condensing steam turbine
produces only electricity, no heat.
2. Back-pressure: Same as condensation, but the steam pressure (and temperature) in the
condenser is higher, so that the temperature of the coolant becomes sufficiently high to be used
for industrial processes or district heating. A back-pressure turbine produces electricity and
heat, at an almost constant ratio.
3. Extraction: Same as condensation, but steam can be extracted from the turbine to produce heat
(equivalent to back-pressure). Very flexible, no fixed ratio between electricity and heat.

16
1.5. References
Numerous reference documents are mentioned in each of the technology sheets. The references
mentioned below are for Chapter 1 only.

1. Danish Energy Agency: ”Forudsætninger for samfundsøkonomiske analyser på energiområdet”


(Generic data to be used for socio-economic analyses in the energy sector), May 2009.
2. “UK Electricity Generation Costs Update”, Mott MacDonald, June 2010; commissioned by the
Department of Energy and Climate Change, United Kingdom.
3. “Projected Costs of Generating Electricity”, International Energy Agency, 2010.

17
2. COMPARISON OF FINANCIAL KEY FIGURES
This chapter presents the financial key figures for all technologies, i.e. specific investment costs and
operation and maintenance costs. Data intervals in the technology sheets have here been shortened to
medium values.
All data are in constant 2011 price level.

Nominal Total Fixed Variable


2015 investment O&M O&M O&M
(M€/MW) % (€/MWh) (€/MW/yr) (€/MW/yr) (€/MWh)
01 Advanced Pulverized Fuel Power Plant
- Coal fired 2,04 7,0 57200 2,0
- fired by wood pellets 2,04 57200 2,0
- natural gas fired 1,40 38000 0,82
03 Rebuilding coal power plants to biomass
- wood pellets 0,18
- wood chips, straw 0,42
- wood chips, dried 0,52
04 Gas Turbine Single Cycle
- large scale plant 0,65 2,4
- medium scale plant 1,20 7,0
- mini gasturbines 1,75 9,0
- micro gasturbines 1,20 15,0
05 Gas Turbine Combined Cycle
- steam extraction 0,87 30000 2,5
- back-pressure 1,35 2,5
06 Gas Engines 1,25 9,2
07 CO2 Capture and Storage 3,30 79500 3,75
08 Waste-to-Energy CHP Plant 8,50 16500 23
09 Biomass CHP, Steam Turbine
- woodchips (medium) 2,60 29000 3,9
- woodchips (small) 4,25 3,5 150000
- straw (medium) 4,00 40000 6,4
- straw (small) 5,15 4,0
10 Stirling Engines, Gasified Biomass 5,00 32000 26

18
Nominal Total Fixed Variable
2015 investment O&M O&M O&M
(M€/MW) % (€/MWh) (€/MW/yr) (€/MW/yr) (€/MWh)
20 Wind Turbines - Onshore
- large 1,40 14
- medium 1,40 14
- small ( > 5 kW ) 2,15
- small ( < 5 kW ) 4,75 30
21 Wind Turbines - Offshore 3,10 19
22 Solar Photovoltaic Cells, Grid-connected 2,00 34
23 Wave Power 7,80 20,0
30 Solid Oxide Fuel Cells
- Continuous Power Generation 5,00 25,0
- Balancing Plant 2,00 25,0
31 Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cells
- Continuous Power Generation 5,00 25,0
- Balancing Plant 2,00 25,0
40 Heat Pumps
- Heat pumps (ambient temperature) 0,68 5500
- Heat pumps ( 35 °C ) 0,68 5500
- Absorption heat pumps (flue gas) 0,40 18500
41 Electric Boilers
- 400 V; 1-3 MW 0,15 1100 0,5
- 10 kV; 10 MW 0,08 1100 0,5
- 10 kV; 20 MW 0,06 1100 0,5
42 Waste-to-Energy District Heating Plant 1,20 54000 5,6
43 District Heating Boiler
- Wood chips 0,80 5,4
- Wood pellets 0,40 2,7
- Straw 0,80 4,0
44 District Heating Boiler - Gas Fired 0,10 3700
45 Geothermal District Heating
- Absorption heat pump ( 70 °C ) 1,80 47000
- Absorption heat pump ( 50 °C ) 2,00 49000
- Electric heat pump 1,60 37000
46 Solar District Heating 0,57

19
Nominal Total Fixed Variable
2015 investment O&M O&M O&M
(M€/MW) % (€/MWh) (€/MW/yr) (€/MW/yr) (€/MWh)
50 Pumped Hydro Storage 0,60 9000
51 Compressed Air Energy Storage 14000
52 Batteries
- Sodium Sulphur (NaS) 2,20 51000 5,3
- 'Vanadium Redox (VRB) 1,50 54000 2,8
60 Heat Storage - Water Pits 0,7
61 Large Scale Hot Water Tanks
71 Underground Storage of Gas
72 Hydrogen Storage
80 Electrolysis
- Alkaline electrolysis (AEC) 1,40 4,0
- Solid Oxide Electrolysis (SOEC)
- Polymer Electrolyte Electrolysis (PEMEC) 6,00
81 Centralised Biogas Plants
- Input: 300 Tons per Day 5,80 35
- Input: 550 Tons per Day 4,10 31
- Input: 800 Tons per Day 3,40 31
- Input: 1000 Tons per Day
82 Upgraded Biogas
- Generating Capacity: 200 Nm3/h
- Generating Capacity: 1000 Nm3/h
83 Biomass Gasifier, Pre-gasifier to Boilers 0,50 2,40
84 Biomass, Gasifier, Updraft 3,70 185000 19
85 Biomass, Gasifiers, Staged Down-draft 3,55 69000 18

20
Nominal Total Variable
Fixed O&M
2020 investment O&M O&M
(M€/MW) % (€/MWh) (€/MW/yr) (€/MW/yr) (€/MWh)
01 Advanced Pulverized Fuel Power Plant
- Coal fired 2,03 7,0 61600 2,2
- fired by wood pellets 2,03 61600 2,2
- natural gas fired 1,30
03 Rebuilding coal power plants to biomass
- wood pellets
- wood chips, straw
- wood chips, dried
04 Gas Turbine Single Cycle
- large scale plant 0,60 3,4
- medium scale plant 1,20 7,0
- mini gasturbines
- micro gasturbines 0,70
05 Gas Turbine Combined Cycle
- steam extraction 0,82 30000 2,5
- back-pressure 1,45 2,5
06 Gas Engines 1,25 9,2
07 CO2 Capture and Storage 3,07 79500 3,75
08 Waste-to-Energy CHP Plant 8,50 16500 23
09 Biomass CHP, Steam Turbine
- woodchips (medium) 2,60 29000 3,9
- woodchips (small) 3,50 3,5
- straw (medium)
- straw (small) 4,60 4,0
10 Stirling Engines, Gasified Biomass 3,80 32000 21

21
Nominal Total Variable
Fixed O&M
2020 investment O&M O&M
(M€/MW) % (€/MWh) (€/MW/yr) (€/MW/yr) (€/MWh)
20 Wind Turbines - Onshore
- large 1,32 13,0
- medium 1,32 13,0
- small ( > 5 kW )
- small ( < 5 kW )
21 Wind Turbines - Offshore 2,40 17,0
22 Solar Photovoltaic Cells, Grid-connected 1,30
23 Wave Power 6,40 15,0
30 Solid Oxide Fuel Cells
- Continuous Power Generation 1,50 10,0
- Balancing Plant 0,40 10,0
31 Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cells
- Continuous Power Generation 1,50 10,0
- Balancing Plant 0,40 10,0
40 Heat Pumps
- Heat pumps (ambient temperature) 0,63 3650
- Heat pumps ( 35 °C ) 0,63 3650
- Absorption heat pumps (flue gas)
41 Electric Boilers
- 400 V; 1-3 MW 0,15 1100 0,5
- 10 kV; 10 MW 0,08 1100 0,5
- 10 kV; 20 MW 0,06 1100 0,5
42 Waste-to-Energy District Heating Plant 1,10 53000 5,4
43 District Heating Boiler
- Wood chips 0,80 5,4
- Wood pellets 0,40 2,7
- Straw 0,80 4,0
44 District Heating Boiler - Gas Fired 0,10 3700
45 Geothermal District Heating
- Absorption heat pump ( 70 °C ) 1,80 47000
- Absorption heat pump ( 50 °C ) 2,00 49000
- Electric heat pump 1,60 34000
46 Solar District Heating 0,57

22
Nominal Total Variable
Fixed O&M
2020 investment O&M O&M
(M€/MW) % (€/MWh) (€/MW/yr) (€/MW/yr) (€/MWh)
50 Pumped Hydro Storage 0,60 9000
51 Compressed Air Energy Storage 14000
52 Batteries
- Sodium Sulphur (NaS) 1,70 51000 5,3
- 'Vanadium Redox (VRB) 1,10 54000 2,8
60 Heat Storage - Water Pits
61 Large Scale Hot Water Tanks
71 Underground Storage of Gas
72 Hydrogen Storage
80 Electrolysis
- Alkaline electrolysis (AEC) 1,00 4,0
- Solid Oxide Electrolysis (SOEC) 0,59 15000
- Polymer Electrolyte Electrolysis (PEMEC) 1,00
81 Centralised Biogas Plants
- Input: 300 Tons per Day 5,40 35
- Input: 550 Tons per Day 3,80 31
- Input: 800 Tons per Day 3,20 31
- Input: 1000 Tons per Day
82 Upgraded Biogas
- Generating Capacity: 200 Nm3/h
- Generating Capacity: 1000 Nm3/h
83 Biomass Gasifier, Pre-gasifier to Boilers 0,40 2,4
84 Biomass, Gasifier, Updraft
85 Biomass, Gasifiers, Staged Down-draft 2,75 57000 17

23
Nominal Total Variable
Fixed O&M
2030 investment O&M O&M
(M€/MW) % (€/MWh) (€/MW/yr) (€/MW/yr) (€/MWh)
01 Advanced Pulverized Fuel Power Plant
- Coal fired 1,99 7,0 61600 2,2
- fired by wood pellets 1,99 61600 2,2
- natural gas fired 1,30
03 Rebuilding coal power plants to biomass
- wood pellets
- wood chips, straw
- wood chips, dried
04 Gas Turbine Single Cycle
- large scale plant 0,60 3,4
- medium scale plant 1,20 7,0
- mini gasturbines
- micro gasturbines 0,50
05 Gas Turbine Combined Cycle
- steam extraction 0,81 30000 2,5
- back-pressure 1,45 2,5
06 Gas Engines 1,25 9,2
07 CO2 Capture and Storage 3,00 79500 3,75
08 Waste-to-Energy CHP Plant 8,50 16500 23
09 Biomass CHP, Steam Turbine
- woodchips (medium) 2,60 29000 3,9
- woodchips (small) 3,50 3,5
- straw (medium)
- straw (small) 4,60 4,0
10 Stirling Engines, Gasified Biomass

24
Nominal Total Variable
Fixed O&M
2030 investment O&M O&M
(M€/MW) % (€/MWh) (€/MW/yr) (€/MW/yr) (€/MWh)
20 Wind Turbines - Onshore
- large 1,29 12,0
- medium 1,29 12,0
- small ( > 5 kW )
- small ( < 5 kW )
21 Wind Turbines - Offshore 2,30 16,0
22 Solar Photovoltaic Cells, Grid-connected 1,10 19,0
23 Wave Power 3,85 10,0
30 Solid Oxide Fuel Cells
- Continuous Power Generation 0,80 4,0
- Balancing Plant 0,40 10,0
31 Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cells
- Continuous Power Generation 0,80 4,0
- Balancing Plant 0,40 10,0
40 Heat Pumps
- Heat pumps (ambient temperature) 0,58 3650
- Heat pumps ( 35 °C ) 0,58 3650
- Absorption heat pumps (flue gas)
41 Electric Boilers
- 400 V; 1-3 MW 0,15 1100 0,5
- 10 kV; 10 MW 0,08 1100 0,5
- 10 kV; 20 MW 0,06 1100 0,5
42 Waste-to-Energy District Heating Plant 1,10 53000 5,4
43 District Heating Boiler
- Wood chips 0,80 5,4
- Wood pellets 0,40 2,7
- Straw 0,80 4,0
44 District Heating Boiler - Gas Fired 0,10 3700
45 Geothermal District Heating
- Absorption heat pump ( 70 °C ) 1,80 47000
- Absorption heat pump ( 50 °C ) 2,00 49000
- Electric heat pump 1,60 34000
46 Solar District Heating 0,57

25
Nominal Total Variable
Fixed O&M
2030 investment O&M O&M
(M€/MW) % (€/MWh) (€/MW/yr) (€/MW/yr) (€/MWh)
50 Pumped Hydro Storage 0,60 9000
51 Compressed Air Energy Storage 14000
52 Batteries
- Sodium Sulphur (NaS) 1,70 51000 5,3
- 'Vanadium Redox (VRB) 1,10 54000 2,8
60 Heat Storage - Water Pits
61 Large Scale Hot Water Tanks
71 Underground Storage of Gas
72 Hydrogen Storage
80 Electrolysis
- Alkaline electrolysis (AEC) 4,0
- Solid Oxide Electrolysis (SOEC) 0,59 15000
- Polymer Electrolyte Electrolysis (PEMEC)
81 Centralised Biogas Plants
- Input: 300 Tons per Day 5,40 35,0
- Input: 550 Tons per Day 3,80 31,0
- Input: 800 Tons per Day 3,20 31,0
- Input: 1000 Tons per Day
82 Upgraded Biogas
- Generating Capacity: 200 Nm3/h
- Generating Capacity: 1000 Nm3/h
83 Biomass Gasifier, Pre-gasifier to Boilers 0,30 2,40
84 Biomass, Gasifier, Updraft
85 Biomass, Gasifiers, Staged Down-draft 2,70 57000 17

26
Nominal Total Fixed Variable
2050 investment O&M O&M O&M
(M€/MW) % (€/MWh) (€/MW/yr) (€/MW/yr) (€/MWh)
01 Advanced Pulverized Fuel Power Plant
- Coal fired 1,89 7,0 61600 2,2
- fired by wood pellets 1,89 61600 2,2
- natural gas fired 1,30
03 Rebuilding coal power plants to biomass
- wood pellets
- wood chips, straw
- wood chips, dried
04 Gas Turbine Single Cycle
- large scale plant 0,60 3,4
- medium scale plant 1,20 7,0
- mini gasturbines
- micro gasturbines
05 Gas Turbine Combined Cycle
- steam extraction 0,79 30000 2,5
- back-pressure 2,5
06 Gas Engines
07 CO2 Capture and Storage 2,86 79500 3,75
08 Waste-to-Energy CHP Plant 8,50 16500 23
09 Biomass CHP, Steam Turbine
- woodchips (medium) 2,60 29000 3,9
- woodchips (small) 3,50 3,5
- straw (medium)
- straw (small) 4,60 4,0
10 Stirling Engines, Gasified Biomass

27
Nominal Total Fixed Variable
2050 investment O&M O&M O&M
(M€/MW) % (€/MWh) (€/MW/yr) (€/MW/yr) (€/MWh)
20 Wind Turbines - Onshore
- large 1,22 12,0
- medium 1,22 12,0
- small ( > 5 kW )
- small ( < 5 kW )
21 Wind Turbines - Offshore 2,10 15,0
22 Solar Photovoltaic Cells, Grid-connected 0,90 13,0
23 Wave Power 1,60 7,0
30 Solid Oxide Fuel Cells
- Continuous Power Generation 0,50 3,0
- Balancing Plant
31 Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cells
- Continuous Power Generation 0,50 3,0
- Balancing Plant
40 Heat Pumps
- Heat pumps (ambient temperature) 0,53 3650
- Heat pumps ( 35 °C ) 0,52 3650
- Absorption heat pumps (flue gas)
41 Electric Boilers
- 400 V; 1-3 MW 0,15 1100 0,5
- 10 kV; 10 MW 0,08 1100 0,5
- 10 kV; 20 MW 0,06 1100 0,5
42 Waste-to-Energy District Heating Plant
43 District Heating Boiler
- Wood chips
- Wood pellets
- Straw
44 District Heating Boiler - Gas Fired
45 Geothermal District Heating
- Absorption heat pump ( 70 °C )
- Absorption heat pump ( 50 °C )
- Electric heat pump
46 Solar District Heating

28
Nominal Total Fixed Variable
2050 investment O&M O&M O&M
(M€/MW) % (€/MWh) (€/MW/yr) (€/MW/yr) (€/MWh)
50 Pumped Hydro Storage 0,60 9000
51 Compressed Air Energy Storage 14000
52 Batteries
- Sodium Sulphur (NaS)
- 'Vanadium Redox (VRB) 1,10
60 Heat Storage - Water Pits
61 Large Scale Hot Water Tanks
71 Underground Storage of Gas
72 Hydrogen Storage
80 Electrolysis
- Alkaline electrolysis (AEC)
- Solid Oxide Electrolysis (SOEC)
- Polymer Electrolyte Electrolysis (PEMEC)
81 Centralised Biogas Plants
- Input: 300 Tons per Day
- Input: 550 Tons per Day
- Input: 800 Tons per Day
- Input: 1000 Tons per Day
82 Upgraded Biogas
- Generating Capacity: 200 Nm3/h
- Generating Capacity: 1000 Nm3/h
83 Biomass Gasifier, Pre-gasifier to Boilers 0,30 2,40
84 Biomass, Gasifier, Updraft
85 Biomass, Gasifiers, Staged Down-draft

29
3. TECHNOLOGY SHEETS
The following technologies are included in this catalogue:
Electricity generation and CHP, thermal processes
01 Advanced pulverized fuel power plant, large-scale
03 Steam turbines, refurbishment coal-to-biomass
04 Gas turbine, single cycle
05 Gas turbine, combined cycle
06 Gas engines
07 Power plants with CO2 capture and storage
08 Waste CHP
09 Biomass CHP, medium - small
10 Stirling engine, gasified biomass
Electricity generation, non-thermal processes
20 Wind turbines, on land
21 Wind turbines, offshore
22 Solar photovoltaics, grid connected
23 Wave power
Electricity generation, fuel cells
30 Fuel cells, solid oxide
31 Fuel cells, proton exchange membrane
Heat generation
40 Heat pumps
41 Electric boilers
42 Waste-to-energy district heating
43 District heating boiler, biomass
44 District heating boiler, gas
45 Geothermal heat
46 Solar district heat
Energy storage
50 Pumped hydro storage
51 Compressed air energy storage
52 Batteries
60 Seasonal heat storage
61 Large hot-water tanks
62 Small hot-water tanks
71 Underground gas storage
72 Hydrogen storage
Energy carrier generation and conversion
80 Electrolysis
81 Biogas, centralised
82 Biogas upgrading
83 Gasifier, biomass, pre-gasifer to power plants
84 Gasifier, biomass, up-draft
85 Gasifier, biomass, staged
The technology sheets have not all been completed equally. In some cases data are missing, which
reflects that it has not been possible to identify sufficiently reliable sources for such data.

30
01 ADVANCED PULVERIZED FUEL POWER PLANT

Brief technology description


Large base-load units with pulverised fuel (PF) combustion and advanced (supercritical) steam data.

Supercritical steam data are above 240-260 bar and 560-570 oC. The term „ultra-supercritical‟ has been
used (e.g. by ref. 4) for plants with steam temperatures of approximately 580 oC and above. Advanced
data (AD) goes up to 350 bar and 700 oC (ref. 3). The advanced steam cycle includes up to ten pre-
heaters and double re-heating.

The AD plants obtain higher efficiencies, both the electricity efficiency in condensing mode and the
total energy efficiency in backpressure mode. The higher efficiencies are obtained in full load mode as
well as part load and the high efficiencies remain even after many years of operation.

The integrated coal gasification combined-cycle (IGCC) plants are a fundamentally different coal
technology, expected to achieve efficiencies above 50% in demonstration projects before year 2020
(ref. 4). Data for this technology are not presented below, since the AD technology appears to have
better performance data.

Input
The process is primarily based on coal, but will be applicable to other fuels such as wood pellets and
natural gas.

Output
Power and possibly heat.

The auxiliary power need for a 500 MW plant is 40-45 MW, and the net electricity efficiency is thus
3.7-4.3 percentage points lower than the gross efficiency (ref. 3).

Typical capacities
AD plants are built in capacities from 400 MW to 1000 MW.

Regulation ability
Pulverized fuel power plants are able to deliver both primary load support (frequency control) and
secondary load support.

The units are in general able to deliver 5% of their rated capacity as primary load support within 30
seconds at loads between 50% and 90%. This fast load control is achieved by utilizing certain
water/steam buffers within the unit. The secondary load control takes over after approximately 5
minutes, when the primary load control has utilized its water/steam buffers. The secondary load control
is able to sustain the 5% load rise achieved by the primary load control and even further to increase the
load (if not already at maximum load) by running up the boiler load.

31
Negative load changes can also be achieved by by-passing steam (past the turbine) or by closure of the
turbine steam valves and subsequent reduction of boiler load.

A secondary regulation ability of 4% per minute is achievable between approximately 50% and 90%
load on a pulverized fuel fired unit. The unit will respond slower below 50% and above 90%,
approximately at 2% per minute (ref. 5).

Advantages/disadvantages
The efficiencies are not reduced as significantly at part load compared to full load as with CC-plants.

Coal fired power plants using the advanced steam cycle possess the same fuel flexibility as the
conventional boiler technology. However, AD plants have higher requirements concerning fuel quality.
Inexpensive heavy fuel oil cannot be burned due to materials like vanadium, unless the steam
temperature (and hence efficiency) is reduced, and biomass fuels may cause corrosion and scaling, if
not handled properly.

Environment
The main ecological footprints from coal-fired AD plants are bulk waste (disposal of earth, cinder, and
rejects from mining), climate change and acidification. The fly ash can be utilized 100% in cement and
concrete.

Research and development


Conventional super critical coal technology is fairly well established and so there appear to be no major
breakthroughs ahead. There is very limited scope to improve the cycle thermodynamically. It is more
likely that the application of new materials will allow higher efficiencies, though this is unlikely to
come at a significantly lower cost (ref. 6).

Best-available-technology plants today operate at up to 600 oC. An electricity efficiency of 55 %


requires steam at 700 oC and the use of nickel-based alloys (ref. 2). Further RD&D in such alloy steels
is required in order to obtain increased strength, lower costs and thereby cheaper and more flexible
plants.

Examples of best available technology


Avedøre Power Station (Copenhagen), Unit 2; 570 MW; gas fired; steam at turbine inlet 580 oC and
300 bar; pre-coupled gas turbines.
Nordjylland Power Station, Unit 3; 400 MW, commissioned 1998, coal fired.
Skærbæk Power Station, Unit 3; 400 MW, gas fired; commissioned 1997.

Additional remarks
The efficiencies shown in the tables below assume the availability of sufficient cooling water at low
temperatures (North European oceans).

A steam extraction turbine enables a large degree of freedom in varying the electricity and heat
generation. This is shown by the below (ideal) figure:

32
Power

C
PC Cv
MC
PB B

Cb

Heat

QMC QB

PC: Power capacity in full condensation mode; point C. No heat production.


: Electricity efficiency in full condensation mode.
QB: Heat capacity in full back-pressure mode (no low-pressure condensation); point B.
PB: Power capacity in full back-pressure mode.
QMC: Heat capacity at minimum low-pressure condensation; point MC.
cv: Loss of electricity generation per unit of heat generated at fixed fuel input; assumed constant.
cb: Back-pressure coefficient (electricity divided by heat); assumed constant.

The fuel consumption H for any given combination of power generation (P) and heat generation (Q):

At point MC the efficiencies can be determined by:

: Electricity efficiency at minimum low-pressure condensation:

: Heat efficiency at minimum low-pressure condensation:

: Total efficiency (electricity plus heat) at minimum low-pressure condensation:

33
In 2009, 3 out of 13 Danish extraction steam turbines had QMC/QB = 1.0, the average of all units being
0.80. This excludes a number of extraction steam turbines, which to a large extent were operated as
condensation turbines, since the district heating loads were very small.

More details are given in Annex 1.

The biggest capital items of a coal plant are boiler, steam turbine and generator, with the boiler alone
accounting for over 25% of costs. The civil works component falls around 20%, while the fuel handling
is larger item than for most other technologies, except solid fuel biomass. Flue gas desulphurisation
(FGD), which once accounted for some 15-20% of investment cost has fallen over time such that FGD
and SCR (selective catalytic reduction of NOx) together typically account for some 10-15% of
investment (ref. 6).

References
1. Elsam‟s and Elkraft‟s update of the Danish Energy Authority‟s technology catalogue (in Danish),
'Teknologidata for el- og varmeproduktionsanlæg', 1997.
2. Elforsk: ”El från nya anläggningar”, Stockholm, 2000.
3. www.ad700.dk
4. “Energy technology perspectives 2008”, International Energy Agency, 2008.
5. DONG Energy, 2009.
6. “UK Electricity Generation Costs Update”, Mott MacDonald, June 2010; commissioned by the
Department of Energy and Climate Change, United Kingdom.

34
Data sheets
Technology Steam turbine, pulverized coal fired, advanced
steam process
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit (MW) 400 - 700
Electricity efficiency, condensation mode, net (%) 44-48 46-51 52 52-55 C 8;7;9;11
Cb coefficient (50 oC/100 oC) 0.75 0.84 1.01 A
o o
Cv coefficient (50 C/100 C) 0.15 0.15 0.15 1
Availability (%) 95 95 95 E 7
Technical lifetime (years) 40 40 40 40 F 6
Construction time (years) 4.5 4.5 4.5 2;3;3
Environment
SO2 (degree of desulphuring, %) 97 97 97 97 B 5
NOX (g per GJ fuel) 38 35 35 35 B 12;5;5;5
CH4 (g per GJ fuel) 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 13;5;5;5
N2O (g per GJ fuel) 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 13;5;5;5
Financial data
Nominal investment (M€/MW) 2.04 2.03 1.99 1.89 15+16;15;
15;15
Fixed O&M (€/MW/year) 57200 61600 61600 61600 15;9;9;9
Variable O&M (€/MWh) 2.0 2.2 2.2 2.2 15;9;9;9
Regulation ability
Primary load support (% per 30 seconds) 5 5 5 5 D 14
Secondary load support (% per minute) 4 4 4 4 D 14
Minimum load (% of full load) 18 15 15 10 10+14

References:
1 Elsam, November 2003
2 Elsam's and Elkraft's update of the Danish Energy Agency's 'Teknologidata for el- og
varmeproduktionsanlæg', December 1997
3 Eltra, September 2003
5 Danish Energy Agency, 2009.
6 "Projected costs of generating electricity", International Energy Agency (IEA), 2005.
7 “Energy technology perspectives 2008”, International Energy Agency, 2008.
8 Danish Energy Agency, 2008. Measured data (1994-2006) from newest power plants in Denmark.
9 Own estimate by Danish Energy Agency and Energinet.dk, 2011.
10 Energinet.dk, 2009
11 www.ad700.dk
12 "En opdateret analyse af Danmarks muligheder for at reducere emissionerne af NOx" (Updated analysis of
Denmark's options to reduce NOx emissions; in Danish), Danish Environmental Protection Agency, 2009.
13 National Environmental Research Institute, Denmark, 2009 (data from 2007).
14 DONG Energy, 2009.
15 "UK Electricity Generation Costs Update", Mott MacDonald, June 2010.
16 "The Costs of CO2 Capture, Transport and Storage", Zero Emissions Platform (ZEP), July 2011
Notes:
A The Cb values have been calculated from the electricity efficiencies in condensation mode, the Cv values and
a total efficiency (electricity plus heat) in full back-pressure mode of 90%. Cf. Annex 1.
B The data for SO2 and NOx emissions assume flue gas desulphurisation (wet gypsum) and DeNOx
equipment of the “high dust” SCR type.
C Supercritical in 2010 and ultra-supercritical from 2020.
D Please refer to section 'Regulation ability' in the above qualitative description.
E Outage rates are generally about 5% for plants that are 10-20 years old. Unless the plant is refurbished, the
rate increases to 20% for plants that are 40 years old (ref. 7)
F The lifespan is often quite long (up to 60 years). For this to happen, refurbishment is required (ref. 7).

35
Technology Steam turbine, fired by wood pellets, advanced
steam process
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit (MW) 250-400
Electricity efficiency, condensation mode, net (%) 44-48 46-51 52 52-55 A 8;7;9;11
o o 0.75 0.84 1.01 F
Cb coefficient (50 C/100 C)
Cv coefficient (50 oC/100 oC) 0.15 0.15 0.15 1
Availability (%) 95 95 95 B 7
Technical lifetime (years) 40 40 40 40 E 6
Construction time (years) 4.5 4.5 4.5 2;3;3
Environment
SO2 (degree of desulphuring, %) 0 0 0 0 5
NOX (g per GJ fuel) 38 35 35 35 12;5;5;5
CH4 (g per GJ fuel) 2 2 2 2 13;5;5;5
N2O (g per GJ fuel) 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 13;5;5;5
Financial data
Nominal investment (M€/MW) 2.04 2.03 1.99 1.89 G 15+16;15;
15;15
Fixed O&M (€/MW/year) 57200 61600 61600 61600 G 15;9;9;9
Variable O&M (€/MWh) 2.0 2.2 2.2 2.2 G 15;9;9;9
Regulation ability
Regulation speed (% per min.) 4 4 4 1
Minimum load (% of full load) 20 15 15 10 10+14

References:
1 Elsam, November 2003
2 Elsam's and Elkraft's update of the Danish Energy Authority's 'Teknologidata for el- og
varmeproduktionsanlæg', December 1997
3 Eltra, September 2003
4 "Projected costs of generating electricity", International Energy Agency (IEA), 2005.
5 Danish Energy Agency, 2009.
6 "Projected costs of generating electricity", International Energy Agency (IEA), 2005.
7 “Energy technology perspectives 2008”, International Energy Agency, 2008.
8 "Reference Document on Best Available Techniques for Large Combustion Plants", European Commision
(Integrated Pollution Prevention Control), July 2006.
9 Own estimate by Danish Energy Agency and Energinet.dk, 2011.
10 Energinet.dk, 2009
11 www.ad700.dk
12 "En opdateret analyse af Danmarks muligheder for at reducere emissionerne af NOx" (Updated analysis of
Denmark's options to reduce NOx emissions; in Danish), Danish Environmental Protection Agency, 2009.
13 National Environmental Research Institute, Denmark, 2009 (data from 2007).
14 DONG Energy, 2009.
15 "UK Electricity Generation Costs Update", Mott MacDonald, June 2010.
16 "The Costs of CO2 Capture, Transport and Storage", Zero Emissions Platform (ZEP), July 2011
Notes:
A Supercritical in 2010 and ultra-supercritical from 2020.
B Outage rates are generally about 5% for plants that are 10-20 years old. Unless the plant is refurbished, the
rate increases to 20% for plants that are 40 years old (ref. 7)
C Cost data are the same as in the 2005 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2002 to 2008 by multiplying
by a factor 1.1876 for investment costs and 1.1672 for O&M costs.
D The cost excludes infrastructure, such as habour, district heating transmission, and electricity transmission.
The unit cost refers to the capacity in full condensation mode.
E The lifespan is often quite long (up to 60 years). For this to happen, refurbishment is required (ref. 7).
F The Cb values have been calculated from the electricity efficiencies in condensation mode, the Cv values and
a total efficiency (electricity plus heat) in full back-pressure mode of 90%. Cf. Annex 1.
G Lower end of interval (2010) is ref. 16, upper end ref. 15. 36
Technology Steam turbine, natural gas fired, advanced steam
process
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit (MW) 400
Electricity efficiency, condensation mode, net (%) 45-48 1
Cb coefficient 0.7 1
Cv coefficient 0.17 1
Availability (%) 92 2
Technical lifetime (years) 30 2
Construction time (years) 4.5 2
Environment
SO2 (degree of desulphuring, %) 0 0 0 0 1
NOX (g per GJ fuel) 60 60 60 60 2;1;1;1
CH4 (g per GJ fuel) 6 6 6 6 3;1;1;1
N2O (g per GJ fuel) 1 1 1 1 3;1;1;1
Financial data
Nominal investment (M€/MW) 1.4 1.3 1.3 1.3 A 1
Fixed O&M (€/MW/year) 38000 B 1
Variable O&M (€/MWh) 0.82 B 1

References:
1 Danish Energy Agency and Energinet.dk, 2011
2 Elsams og Elkrafts opdatering af Energistyrelsens 'Teknologidata for el- og varmeproduktionsanlæg', 1997
3 National Environmental Research Institute, Denmark, 2009 (data from 2007).
Notes:
A Investment data are the same as in the 2010 catalogue, however updated with the same cost-ratio as for coal-
fired power plants, mirroring the general surge in equipment cost 2007-2008.
B O&M data are the same as in the 2005 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2002 to 2011 by multiplying
by a factor 1.2306.

37
03 REBUILDING COAL POWER PLANTS TO BIOMASS

Brief technology description


Existing coal power plants may be rebuilt for biomass combustion.

The easiest and cheapest solution is to convert some (or all) of the coal to a fuel with similar
characteristics, such as wood pellets. In such cases it is possible to maintain steam data, efficiencies, cv-
and cb-values.

Conversion to a more different fuel, such as wood chips or straw, requires major changes and is
therefore more time consuming and costly.

Typical capacities
The below financial data are for power plants in the range of 200-400 MW electric capacity.

Environment
Emissions of the greenhouse gases methane (CH4) and laughing gas (N2O) will increase; see data
below.

Examples of best available technology


The financial cost data below are derived from actual projects at Danish power plants Studstrup and
Avedøre.

38
Data sheet
Years 2030 and 2050 have been deleted from the table, since it is believed that rebuilding power plants
from coal to biomass is a temporary measure.

Technology Rebuilding power plants from coal to


biomass
2015 2020 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Typical capacity, MW 200 - 400
Environment
Methane, CH4
Pulverized coal as fuel (g/GJ) 0.6-1 1
- do - 1.5 2
Pulverized wood as fuel (g/GJ) 4 - 50 1
- do - 32 2
Straw as fuel (g/GJ) 32 2
Laughing gas, N2O
Pulverized coal as fuel (g/GJ) 0.5 - 1.6 1
- do - 3 2
Pulverized wood as fuel (g/GJ) 1.2 1
- do - 0.6 2
Straw as fuel (g/GJ) 1.4 2
Financial data
Nominal investment (M€ per MW
converted capacity ) A
- wood pellets 0.13-0.23 3
- wood chips, straw 0.42 B 4
- wood chips, dried 0.50-0.53 C 3

References:
1 "NonCO2 greenhouse gas emissions from boilers and industrial processes", VTT
2 "Emissionsfaktorer for miljøberegninger" (Emission coefficiencts for environmental
calculations; in Danish), Eltra (Danish electricity systems operator), March 2003.
3 Danish Energy Agency and Energinet.dk, 2011. Based on a small number of recent
projects in Denmark.
4 Dong Energy, 2007.
Notes:
A The investments may extend the technical lifetime of the power plant. On the other
hand, the use of biomass may shorten the lifetime.
B The fuel is burned as is, without substantial pretreatment
C Wood chips are dried and milled, then fired same way as pulverized coal. The drier
itself costs around 0.3 M€/MW.
D O&M may increase, e.g. due to reduced life of superheater and increased wear of
deNOx unit. However, no data have been identified. As a first proxy, total O&M costs
in Technology Sheet 01 may be applied.
E Cost data are the same as in the 2010 catalogue, however inflated from price level
2008 to 2011 by multiplying with a general inflation factor 1.053

39
04 GAS TURBINE SINGLE CYCLE

Brief technology description


The major components of a single-cycle (or open-cycle) gas turbine are: Industrial (also called heavy
duty) or aero-derivative single-cycle gas turbine, gear (when needed), and generator. For combined
heat and power production a heat recovery boiler (hot water or steam) is also needed.

Diagramme of a plant designed for


combined heat and power
production.

Industrial gas turbines differ from aero-derivative turbines in that the frames, bearings, and blading is
of heavier construction.

Aero-derivative turbines have generally higher efficiency than industrial ones. Industrial gas turbines
have longer intervals between services compared to the aero-derivatives. However the most service-
demanding module of the aero-derivative gas turbine normally can be exchanged in a couple of days
thus keeping a high availability of the machine.

A few gas turbines are equipped with intercoolers and/or an integrated recuperator (preheating of
combustion air) to increase efficiency - at the expense of an increased exhaust pressure loss.

Input
Typical fuels are natural gas and light oil. Some gas turbines can be fuelled with other fuels such as
LPG, biogas etc., and some gas turbines are available in dual-fuel versions (gas/oil).

Gas fired gas turbines need fuel gas pressure of 20-67 bar, dependent on the gas turbine compression
ratio.

40
Output
Electricity and heat (optional). All heat is found in the exhaust gas and is extracted by an exhaust gas
boiler. Usually, emergency units do not utilize the heat.

Typical capacities
Single-cycle gas turbines are presently available in the 20 kWe - 330 MWe range (ref. 4).

The enclosed data tables cover large scale (40 – 125 MW), medium-scale (5 - 40 MW), small-scale (0.1
– 5.0 MW), and micro gas turbines (0.010 – 0.100 MW).

Regulation ability
A single-cycle gas turbine can be turned on and off within minutes, supplying power during peak
demand. Because they are less efficient than combined cycle plants, they are usually used as peaking
power plants, which operate anywhere from several hours per day to a few dozen hours per year.

However, every start/stop has a measurable influence on service costs and maintenance intervals. As a
rule-of-thumb a start costs 10 hours in technical life expectancy (ref. 6).

Gas turbines are able to operate part load. This reduces the electrical efficiency. Normally, gas turbines
with dry low NOx burners can keep emissions below 15-25 ppm in a load range of 60-100%, but at
lower loads the emission will increase and can thereby limit the regulation ability.

The heat produced from the heat content of the exhaust gas can be either hot water (for heating or low-
temperature process needs) or steam for process needs. Steam production is closely linked to the actual
load of the turbine. Variations in steam production may be achieved by supplementary firing in the
exhaust boiler.

Service contracts are usually based on generated electricity, whereby reduced generation will increase
service intervals and reduce O&M costs.

To operate a gas turbine in power-only mode, the exhaust gas can be emitted directly to the atmosphere
without heat extraction. Approximately 15 % of O&M costs (possibly 20 %) can be saved in power-
only mode (ref. 6).

Advantages/disadvantages
For larger units, plants above 15 MW, the combined cycle technology has so far been more attractive,
when used as cogeneration plants for district heating (ref. 5).

Single-cycle gas turbine plants have short start up/close down time if needed.

Construction times for gas turbine based single cycle plants are shorter than steam turbine plants.

Small (radial) gas turbines below 100 kWe are now on the market, the so-called micro-turbines. These
are often equipped with preheating of combustion air based on heat from the exhaust (recuperator) to
achieve reasonable single-cycle electrical efficiency (25-30 %).

41
Research and development
Continuous research is being done concerning higher inlet temperature at first turbine blades to achieve
higher electrical efficiency and output. This research is focussed on materials and/or cooling of blades,
nozzles and combustors.

For several years large efforts have been made to improve the efficiency of gas turbines. The most
important issue has been to increase the turbine inlet temperature (TIT). Today, the best large industrial
gas turbines have TIT of approx. 1275 oC. In the near future TIT is expected to increase to almost 1400
o
C for the current generation of turbines. For new generations the TIT is likely to become even higher.
A higher TIT will invariably lead to a higher NOx emission. It is therefore necessary to develop new
burner technologies, e.g. catalytic burners or use catalytic cleaning of the exhaust gas (ref. 5).

For 50-100 MW gas turbines, high efficiencies (above 46 %) have been reached through inter-cooling
and recuperators.

Continuous development for less polluting combustion is taking place.

Development to achieve shorter time for service is also being done.

In the long perspective there are great expectations to temperature resistant ceramic materials and a
new combustion technique (sequential combustion), which will allow even the small turbines to
become more efficient (ref. 5).

Micro-turbines:
Remote operation
Low-cost recuperators
Multi fuel availability and improved lifetime of critical components.

Additional remarks
The economic data do not include additional environmental equipment.

Low-NOx technology is assumed. Water or steam injection may reduce the NOx emission, but also the
total efficiency and thereby possibly the financial viability. The trend is more towards dry low-NOx
combustion, which increases the specific cost of the gas turbine (ref. 5).

Small (radial) gas turbines below 100 kWe are now on the market, the so-called micro-turbines. These
are often equipped with preheating of combustion air based on heat from the exhaust (recuperator) to
achieve reasonable electricity production efficiency. If micro-turbines are installed in combination with
fuel cells (hybrid cycle), an electricity efficiency of some 50-60 % may be expected. With further
developments, this will increase up to 70 % according to ref. 3.

42
References
1. Diesel & Gas Turbine World Wide Catalogue, Brookfield US
2. Cogeneration and On-site Power Production, James and James UK
3. Opportunities for Micropower and Fuel Cell/Gas Turbine Hybrid Systems in Industrial
Applications, Arthur D. Little, 2000, US
4. Gas Turbine World Handbook, 2003.
5. Danish Energy Agency: “Teknologidata for el- og varmeproduktionsanlæg”, 1995.
6. Danish Gas Technology Centre, 2011.

43
Data sheets

Technology Gas turbine, single cycle, large


2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit (MW) 40 - 125
Total efficiency (%) net 80 - 85 80 - 85 80 - 85 3
Electricity efficiency (%) net 35 - 44 42 - 50 42 - 50 4;2;2
Cb (50oC/100oC) 0.84 - 1.04 0.84 - 1.3 0.84 - 1.3 2
Forced outage (%) 5 5 5 2
Planned outage (weeks per year) 3 3 3 2
Technical lifetime (years) 25 25 25 2
Construction time (years) 2 2 2 2
Environment
SO2 (degree of desulphuring, %) 0 0 0 0 3
NOX (g per GJ fuel) 48 46 42 38 3
CH4 (g per GJ fuel) 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3
N2O (g per GJ fuel) 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 3
Financial data
Nominal investment (M€/MW) 0.4 - 0.9 0.6 0.6 0.6 A 5;1;1;1
Total O&M (€/MWh) 0.8 - 5.6 3.4 3.4 3.4 B 5;1;1;1
Regulation ability
Fast reserve (MW per minute) 50 C 4
Minimum load (% of full load) 40 - 60% 40 - 60% 40 - 60% D 2

References:
1 Danish Energy Agency and Energinet.dk, 2011
2 Elsam, 2003
3 Danish Gas Technology Centre, 2012
4 DONG Energy, 2009.
5 “Projected costs of generating electricity”, International Energy Agency and Nuclear Energy Agency, 2010.
6 Sjællandske Kraftværker: Grovdata IRP99, November 1999. Generic data.
7 Gas Turbine World Handbook, 2003.
Notes:
A The data are valid for high-efficiency (aero-derivative) gas turbines. Investment costs of low-efficiency
turbines (industrial; 32-35% electrical efficiency) are typically 0.36-0.54 M€/MW (ref. 7). Variable O&M for
industrial turbines is typically 1.1-1.9 €/MWh (ref. 6).
B The O&M depends much on the gas turbine configuration, with aeroderivates being considerably more
expensive than industrial turbines (ref. 4).
C The GE LMS100 can change from 50 to 100 MW in less than one minute (ref. 4).
D Technically 0%, but due to emissions 40 - 60%

44
Technology Gas turbine, single cycle, medium
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit (MW) 5 - 40

Total efficiency (%) net 80 - 85 80 - 85 80 - 85 1


Electricity efficiency (%) net 36-40 36-42 36-45 1
o o
Cb (50 C/100 C) 0.64-1.00 0.64 - 1.04 0.64 - 1.04 3
Availability (%) 90 90 90 2;3;3
Technical lifetime (years) 25 25 25 2;3;3
Construction time (years) 1-2 1-2 1-2 2;3;3
Environment
SO2 (degree of desulphuring, %) 0 0 0 0 1
NOX (g per GJ fuel) 48 46 42 38 1
CH4 (g per GJ fuel) 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1
N2O (g per GJ fuel) 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1
Financial data
Nominal investment (M€/MW) 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 4:5:5:5
Total O&M (€/MWh) 7 7 7 7 4:5:5:5

References:
1 Danish Gas Technology Centre, 2012
2 Elsam's and Elkraft's update of the Danish Energy Authority's 'Teknologidata for el- og
varmeproduktionsanlæg', December 1997
3 Elsam, 2003
4 “Projected costs of generating electricity”, International Energy agency and Nuclear Energy Agency, 2010.
5 Danish Energy Agency and Energinet.dk, 2011

45
Technology Gas turbine, single cycle, mini
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit (MW) 0.1 - 5
Total efficiency (%) net 80 - 85 3
Electricity efficiency (%) net 28 - 35 3
Cb (50 oC/100 oC) 0.55-1.1 1
Technical lifetime (years) 10
Construction time (years) < 0.5
Environment
SO2 (degree of desulphuring, %) 0 0 0 0 2
NOX (g per GJ fuel) 48 46 42 38 3
CH4 (g per GJ fuel) 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 3
N2O (g per GJ fuel) 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 3
Financial data
Nominal investment (M€/MW) 1.4-2.1 A 3
Total O&M (€/MWh) 9 A 3

References:
1 Elforsk rapport nr 00:01: "El från nya anläggningar", January 2000
2 Danish Energy Agency, 2009.
3 Danish Gas Technology Centre, 2012
Notes:
A Cost data are the same as in the 2005 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2002 to 2011 by
multiplying by a factor 1.2306.

46
05 GAS TURBINE COMBINED CYCLE

More specific details on gas turbine technology are presented in technology sheet ‟04 Gas Turbine
Single Cycle‟.

Brief technology description


Industrial or aero-derivative gas turbine, gear (if needed) and generator. Exhaust gas is led to a steam
producing heat recovery boiler. The steam is used in a power producing steam turbine.

Diagramme of a plant designed for combined


heat and power production.
The gas turbine and the steam turbine are
shown driving a shared generator. In real
plants, the two turbines might drive separate
generators. Where the single shaft
configuration contributes with higher reliability,
the multi shaft has a slightly better overall
performance.
The condenser is cooled by the return water
from the district heating network. Since this
water is afterwards heated by the flue gas from
the gas turbine, the condensation temperature
can be fairly low.

The overall energy efficiency depends on the flue gas exhaust temperature, while the electricity
efficiency depends, besides the technical characteristics, on the district heating forward temperature.
However, some plants do not have the option to sell district heat, and the condenser is therefore cooled
by sea/river/lake water.

Plants being able to shift between condensation mode (power only) and back-pressure mode (power
and district heat) need a so-called extraction steam turbine. Such turbines are not available in small
sizes, and dual-mode plants are therefore only feasible in large scales.

The power generated by the gas turbine is typically twice the power generated by the steam turbine. An
extraction steam turbine shifting from full condensation mode at sea temperature to full back-pressure
mode at district heat return temperature typically looses about 10% of its electricity generation

47
capacity. For example, a 40 MW gas turbine combined with a 20 MW steam turbine (condensation
mode), looses 2 MW, (10% of 20 MW) or 3% of the total generating capacity (60 MW).

Input
Typical fuels are natural gas and light oil. Some gas turbines can be fuelled with other fuels such as
LPG, biogas etc., and some gas turbines are available in dual-fuel versions (gas/oil).
Gas fired gas turbines need fuel gas pressure of 20-67 bar.

Output
Electricity and heat (for district heating or industrial processes).

Typical capacities
For combined cycle the industry has almost universally used the F class industrial machine rated at 280
MW as its workhorse. Combined with a steam turbine the block capacity is up to 440 MW (ref. 3).

The enclosed datasheets cover large scale (100 – 400 MW) and medium scale (10 – 100 MW).

Regulation ability
A combined-cycle gas turbine (CCGT) plant can be regulated up and down as one unit. If the steam
turbine is out, the gas turbine can still be operating by directing the hot flue gasses through a boiler
designed for high temperature or into a bypass stack.

To some extent CCGT are able to operate part load. This will reduce the electrical efficiency.

CCGT‟s are normally equipped with variable inlet guide vanes, which will improve the part-load
efficiencies in the 85-100 % load range, thus making the part load efficiencies comparable with
conventional steam power plants in this load range. Another means to improve part-load efficiencies is
to split the total generation capacity into more CCGT‟s.

Advantages/disadvantages
Smaller CCGT units have lower electrical efficiencies compared to larger units. Units below 20 MWe
are seldom seen and will face close competition with single cycle gas turbines and reciprocating
engines.

Natural gas fired CCGT‟s are characterised by low capital costs, high electricity efficiencies, short
construction times and short start-up times.

The scale of economics is substantial, i.e. the specific cost of plants below 200 MWe is increasing
considerably as capacity decreases. The general trend towards higher efficiencies may result in slightly
higher specific costs (ref. 4).

The high air/fuel ratio for gas turbines leads to lower overall efficiency for a given flue gas cooling
temperature compared to steam cycles and cogeneration based on internal combustion engines.
However, combined cycle units are among the best technologies with regard to the electricity/heat

48
ratio. The somewhat lower total efficiency can therefore be excused by the extremely high electricity
efficiency.

Research and development


Continuous research is done concerning higher inlet temperature at first turbine blades to achieve
higher electricity efficiency. This research is focused on materials and/or cooling of blades.

Continuous development for less polluting combustion is taking place. Increasing the turbine inlet
temperature may increase the NOx production. To keep a low NOx emission different options are at
hand or are being developed, i.e. catalytic burners and dry low-NOx burners.

Development to achieve shorter time for service is also being done.

Examples of best available technology


In 2009, Eon opened one of the most efficient power plants in Europe, the CHP plant Öresundsverket
in Malmö, Sweden. The 440 MW CCGT has an electrical efficiency of 58 % and a total efficiency, at
full cogeneration, of 90 %. The total investment figure for the project was €300 million (ref. 5).

Additional remarks
The main rotating parts (the gas turbine, steam turbine and the generator) tend to account for around
45-50% of the investment costs (EPC price), the heat recovery steam generator, condenser and cooling
system around 20%, the balance of plant and electricals around 15%, the civil works around 15% and
the remainder being miscellaneous other items (ref. 3).

References

1. Diesel & Gas Turbine World Wide Catalogue, Brookfield US


2. Cogeneration and On-site Power Production, James and James UK
3. “UK Electricity Generation Costs Update”, Mott MacDonald, June 2010; commissioned by the
Department of Energy and Climate Change, United Kingdom.
4. Danish Energy Agency: “Teknologidata for el- og varmeproduktion”, 1995.
5. EuroHeat&Power, Vol. 6, III/2009.

49
Data sheets

The first data sheet (large plants) is with steam extraction steam turbines, whereas the next sheet (small
and medium-size plants) is with back-pressure steam turbines, since steam extraction is often too costly
for such small plants.

Technology Gas turbine combined cycle, steam extraction

2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref


Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit (MW) 100 - 400
Electricity efficiency (%) net, condensation 55 - 58 58-62 59-64 59-64 1
Cv coefficient 0.13 0.13 0.13 5
Cb coefficient 1.34 1.75 1.75 A
Availability (%) 94 94 94 2;5;5
Technical lifetime (years) 25 25 25 6
Construction time (years) 1.5 - 2 1.5 - 2 1.5 - 2 1.5 - 2 10
Environment
NOX (g per GJ fuel) 48 46 42 38 1
CH4 (g per GJ fuel) 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 4;9;9;9
N2O (g per GJ fuel) 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1
Financial data
Nominal investment (M€/MW) 0.87 0.82 0.81 0.79 10
Fixed O&M (€/MW/year) 30000 30000 30000 30000 10
Variable O&M (€/MWh) 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 10
Regulation ability
Fast reserve (% per minute) 10 10 10 5

References:
1 Danish Gas Technology Centre, 2012
2 Elsam's and Elkraft's update of the Danish Energy Authority's 'Teknologidata for el- og varmeproduktionsanlæg',
3 December 1997 of generating electricity", International Energy Agency (IEA), 2005.
"Projected costs
4 National Environmental Research Institute, Denmark, 2009 (data from 2007).
5 Elsam, 2003
6 International Energy Agency (IEA): “Renewable Energy Costs and Benefits for Society (RECaBS)”, an interactive
website (http://recabs.iea-retd.org), 2007.
7 “Energy technology perspectives 2008”, International Energy Agency, 2008.
8 “Energy technology perspectives 2006”, International Energy Agency, 2006.
9 Own estimate by Danish Energy Agency and Energinet.dk, 2009.
10 “UK Electricity Generation Costs Update”, Mott MacDonald, June 2010; commissioned by the Department of Energy
and Climate Change, United Kingdom.
Notes:
A The Cb values have been calculated from the electricity efficiencies in condensation mode, the Cv values and a total
efficiency (electricity plus heat) in full back-pressure mode of 90%. Cf. Annex 1.

50
Technology Gas turbine combined cycle, back-pressure

2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref


Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit (MW) 10 - 100
Total efficiency (%) net 82-89 91 91 1;4;4
Electricity efficiency (%) net 41-55 48 - 56 48 - 56 A 2
Availability (%) 94 94 94 4
Planned outage (weeks per year) 2-3 2-3 2-3 4
Technical lifetime (years) 25 25 25 25 5
Construction time (years) 2.5 2.5 2.5 4
Environment
NOX (g per GJ fuel) 48 46 42 38 2
CH4 (g per GJ fuel) 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 7;6;6;6
N2O (g per GJ fuel) 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 2
Financial data
Nominal investment (M€/MW) 1.1-1.6 1.2-1.7 1.2-1.7 B 1
Total O&M (€/MWh) 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3;1;1;1
Regulation ability
Fast reserve (% per minute) 10 10 10 4

References:
1 Danish Energy Agency and Energinet.dk, 2011
2 Danish Gas Technology Centre, 2012
3 "Projected costs of generating electricity", International Energy Agency (IEA), 2005.
4 Elsam, 2003
5 International Energy Agency (IEA): “Renewable Energy Costs and Benefits for Society (RECaBS)”, an
interactive website (http://recabs.iea-retd.org), 2007.
6 Danish Energy Agency, 2009.
7 National Environmental Research Institute, Denmark, 2009 (data from 2007).
Notes:
A 2015 values are averages developed from measured data (1994-2006) from 6 plants in operation.
B Investment data are the same as in the 2010 catalogue, however updated with the same cost-ratio as for
large CCGT, mirroring the surge in equipment cost 2007-2008.

51
06 GAS ENGINES

Brief technology description


A gas engine drives an electricity generator, whereas engine cooling and exhaust gas can be used for
heat generation, e.g. for district heating or low-pressure steam.

A gas engine drives an electricity generator, whereas engine, oil and compressor cooling and exhaust
gas can be used for heat generation, e.g. for district heating or low-pressure steam. In district heating
systems with low return temperatures exhaust gas can be cleaned and heat recovered in a condensing
cooler prior to emission.

Spark ignition engines are commonly categorized according to the air/fuel-ratio:


In stoichiometric combustion the amount of air is just sufficient for (theoretically) complete
combustion. This is employed in engines with 3-way catalysts.
Lean-burn engines have a high air/fuel-ratio. The combustion temperature and hence the NOx
emission is thereby reduced. The engines are normally equipped with oxidation catalysts for CO-
reduction. Engines with air/fuel ratios above 1.8 are ignited by a flame in a precombustion
chamber (prechamber engines). These chambers require a gas inlet pressure of 3.5 – 4 bar.

A dual-fuel engine is a gas engine that - instead of spark plugs - uses a small amount of oil (3 – 12 %)
to ignite the air-gas mix by compression (similar to the diesel engine).

Large engines can offered as combined cycle solutions, i.e. where the heat in the exhaust gas is driving
a steam turbine (ref. 3).

Input
Gas, e.g. natural gas, biogas, landfill gas, and bio syngas (from thermal gasification).
Multi-fuel engines are also on the market.

In recent years, engines have been developed to use gasses with increasingly lower heating values and
higher contents of impurities.

Output
Electricity and heat (district heat; low-pressure steam; industrial drying processes; absorption cooling)

Typical capacities
5 kW - 8 MW per engine.

Regulation ability
Fast start-up.
Part load possible; with slightly decreased electric efficiencies. The dual-fuel engines have the least
decrease of efficiency at part load.

52
Gas engines have better regulation characteristics than gas turbines: They start faster (within 15
minutes), modest efficiency reduction at part load, and they can shift fuel during operation (ref. 3).

To operate an engine in power-only mode, the exhaust gas can be emitted directly to the atmosphere
without heat extraction, while engine heat (about 50 % of total heat) must be removed by a cooler.
Approximately 10 % of O&M costs can be saved in power-only mode (ref. 3).

Combined cycle units are most appropriate as base-load plants. They normally start slowly, requiring
manned start-up, and thus they are not well-suited to be operated at dynamic market conditions (ref. 4).

Advantages/disadvantages
The technology has been commercial and been widely used for many years. During the years shaft
efficiency has been steadily improved and emissions reduced.

Compared with gas turbines, engines cannot be used to produce considerable amounts of high-pressure
steam, as most of the waste heat is released at low temperatures.

Environment
Spark ignition engines comply with national regulations within EU by using catalysts and/or lean-burn
technology.

The main ecological footprint from gas engines is climate change. Gas engines usually emit 20% more
CO2-equivalents than other gas technologies, due to unburned methane in exhaust (ref. 2).

Research and development


Spark ignition engines:
There is a need to further reduce emissions.
Use of various gasses, or gasses with varying composition, need be investigated.
Efficiencies can be improved by new engine designs and optimised operation.

New engine concepts:


The homogenous compression ignition engine combines the homogenous air-fuel mix of the
spark ignition engine with the compression ignition of the diesel engine.
Applying flue gas condensation may increase the heat efficiency by 5-7%.

References
1. Danish Energy Agency, 2003.
2. ”Life cycle assessment of Danish electricity and cogeneration”, Energinet.dk, DONG Energy and
Vattenfall, April 2010.
3. Danish Gas Technology Centre, 2011.
4. Danish District Heating Association, January 2012.

53
Data sheet

Technology Spark ignition engine, natural gas


2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit (MW) 1 - 10
Total efficiency (%) net 88 - 96 88 - 96 88 - 96 A 2
Electricity efficiency (%) net 40 - 48 43 - 50 45 - 53 45 - 53 H 1
o o
Cb (50 C/100 C) 0.9
Availability (%) 95 95 95 B 1+3
Technical lifetime (years) 20 - 25 20 - 25 20 - 25 C 1+3
Construction time (years) <1 <1 <1 1
Environment
SO2 (degree of desulphuring, %) 0 0 0 0 1
NOX (g per GJ fuel) 135 60 60 60 D 1:4;4;4
CH4 (g per GJ fuel) 465 420 375 250 G 1
N2O (g per GJ fuel) 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 1
Financial data
Specific investment (M€/MW) 1.0-1.5 1.0-1.5 1.0-1.5 E 5
Total O&M (€/MWh) 7.4-11 7.4-11 7.4-11 1
Regulation ability
Fast reserve (MW per 15 minutes) From cold to full load within 15 minutes 1
Minimum load (% of full load) 50 F 1

References:
1 Danish Gas Technology Centre (DGC), 2011.
2 Danish Association of District Heating Companies (DFF), 2003.
3 Elsam's and Elkraft's update of the Danish Energy Authority's 'Teknologidata for el- og
varmeproduktionsanlæg', 1997
4 "En opdateret analyse af Danmarks muligheder for at reducere emissionerne af NOx" (Updated
analysis of Denmark's options to reduce NOx emissions; in Danish), Danish Environmental
Protection Agency, 2009.
5 Danish Energy Agency, 2003
Notes:
A May be higher than 100% (flue gas condensation).
B Regular service typically every 1,000 hours. Extra service usually every 2,000, 5,000 and 10,000
hours. Major overhauls usually at 20,000 and 40,000 hours.
C Continual more rigorous environmental regulations offen shorten the practical lifetime.
D Assumed selective catalytic reduction (SCR) from 2020. This will cost about 0.05 M€/MW in
investment and 0.6 €/MWh in additional O&M.
E Cost data are the same as in the 2005 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2002 to 2011
by multiplying by a factor 1.2306.
F The minimum load can be lower, but this is usually not advisable due to lower efficiency
G CH4 emissions can be substantially reduced by flue gas cleaning, which is quite expensive. The
stated figures assume moderat external cleaning from 2030.
H Electric efficiencies above 50 % require a combined-cycle configuration, i.e. a steam-turbine
utilizing the exhaust gas heat.

54
07 CO2 CAPTURE AND STORAGE

Brief technology description


In fossil fired power plants the CO2 content in the flue gas varies between 3 and 15 per cent of total
flue gas volume, depending on the type of fuel and power plant process.

CO2 capture and storage (CCS) is best suited for


large point sources of CO2 such as power plants.
The process involves three main steps:
1. Capture of CO2.
2. Transportation to an injection sink.
3. Underground geological injection.

Several CO2 capture systems are already available on


a smaller scale, but generally they can be divided
into three groups:
Post-combustion capture
Pre-combustion capture
Oxy-fuel combustion

Illustration provided by Vattenfall


(www.vattenfall.com).
Illustrator: www.kjell-design.com

In post-combustion capture the CO2 is separated from the flue gas. Several technologies have been
proposed. The dominant post-combustion technology is CO2 capture by absorption in chemical
solvents, like aqueous amine solutions, which is a commercial technology for some industrial purposes,
but not yet for power plants. After the absorption the CO2 is stripped from the solvent by raising the
temperature, dried, compressed and transported to the storage.

Pre-combustion capture means that the CO2 is removed prior to the actual combustion process in
connection to coal gasification or decarbonisation of natural gas, which essentially produce hydrogen
and CO2. The hydrogen is then used as fuel. The removed CO2 is compressed and transported to the
storage.

In the Oxy-fuel approach the nitrogen in the air is removed prior to combustion and the fuel is
combusted in an atmosphere of oxygen and recycled CO2. The flue gas will only consist of water
vapour and CO2. The water vapour can easily be condensed giving a highly concentrated CO2 stream,
which can be compressed, purified and transported to the storage.

55
The major barrier for a broad use of CO2 removal technology is the current high costs of separating and
compressing the CO2. The extra amount of energy required for this process typically reduces the
overall efficiency by around 10 percentage points.

It is necessary to transport the captured CO2 from the power plant to a location where it can be injected
into a suitable (permanent) storage reservoir. This is believed to be feasible primarily by using
pipelines, alternatively ships, similar to LPG tankers (ref. 1).

Relevant concepts for storage are either use of CO2 for enhanced oil or gas recovery or storage in deep
saline formations – either offshore or onshore. CO2 is also utilised in the industry for manufacture of
chemical products and in the food and drink industry, but due to the large amounts of CO2 from power
plants the only relevant utilisation is for enhanced oil or gas recovery (ref. 4).

Input
CO2 in flue gas.

Output
Stored CO2 and CO2-lean flue gas.

Regulation ability
The regulation ability of a power plant is not influenced by adding post-combustion CO2 capture.
However, the CO2 content in the flue gas decreases at part load, and thus the capture costs (in € per
tonne) increases. Therefore, operating CCS power plants as base load plants may become the preferred
option (ref. 4).

Research and development


Considerable research and development work is required in order to further develop and optimise
techniques that reduce barriers for a wider use, i.e. to achieve greater efficiency, confidence and
monitoring of storage, mitigation strategies (if there should be a leak), and integration of technologies
that require scale and lower cost.

The European Commission supports RD&D on CO2 capture and storage. The 7th Framework
Programme for research, technological development and demonstration activities (2007-2013) intends
to support about ten demonstration plants. The key European stakeholders formed the Zero Emission
Technology Platform (ZEP, www.zeroemissionsplatform.eu) in 2005.

Examples of best available technology


Examples of best available technology for capture projects are (ref. 4):
The Castor pilot plant at Esbjerg Power Station that cleans a 0.5% slip stream from the power
plant using post combustion technology; operated by Dong Energy. The CO2 is released after
capture.
The 30 MJ/s Oxyfuel pilotplant at Schwarze Pumpe Power Plant in Germany that demonstrates
the oxyfuel technology; operated by Vattenfall.

56
In 2007, three large-scale storage projects (over 0.5 Mt injected per year) were in operation around the
world (ref. 8):
Offshore in Norway Statoil is injecting CO2 from the Sleipner oil field in the Utsira aquifer. The
field has a special feature as the gas has a CO2 content of around 9%, which must be reduced to
2.5% before it is sold. The CO2 that is stripped from the gas is injected into a structure 800
metres below the seabed is around one million tonnes of CO2 per year. Injection began in 1996.
The injection and storage is intensively monitored and provides data to various projects.
CO2 is extracted from natural gas from the In Salah gas field in Algeria. The CO2 is injected
into a carboniferous reservoir containing water, underlying the gas producing zone.
CO2 is extracted from natural gas from the Snohvit gas field in the Barents Sea, Norway. The
CO2 is injected 2600 metres underneath the gas producing zone.

Additional remarks
The costs of CCS are often divided according to the three main steps of the process:
1. Capture of CO2, including compression for transport.
2. Transportation to an injection sink.
3. Underground geological storage.

The bulk of the costs of CCS projects are associated with CO2 capture. For the most cost effective
technologies, total capture costs (capital plus O&M costs) are USD 25 to 50 per tonne of CO2
emissions avoided, with transport and storage about USD 10 per tonne (ref. 8). For typical European
offshore settings the transport and storage cost is higher than this, and the variation from project to
project is substantial (ref. 12).

Carbon capture technologies at the scale needed for power plants have not yet been demonstrated.
Hence, most reported cost figures are only estimates, based on scaling up of smaller components used
in other industries or on manufacturers‟ expert judgement based on experience from other (near-)
proven technologies. The accuracy of the resulting estimates usually lies within the range of ±30 %
(ref. 13).

CO2 capture and compression consumes energy, which may result in additional emissions that must be
taken into account when evaluating the impact and the cost-efficiency of CCS. The terms CO2 capture
cost and CO2 avoidance cost are used for these two different evaluation methods.

Capture cost: Cost of capturing one tonne of CO2.


Avoidance cost: Cost of reducing the CO2 emission by one tonne, assuming same electricity
generation.

For power plants, capture cost can be translated into avoidance cost based on the equation:

57
Where new and old are the electricity efficiencies of the power plants with and without CO2 capture,
and CE is the fraction that is captured. For example, if new and old are 35% and 43% and CE is 0.90,
the cost ratio (avoided/captured) is 1.26.

Expressing CCS costs in terms of the cost per tonne of CO2 avoided allows those costs to be directly
compared with other CO2 abatement measures in terms of the cost of the environmental effects that
have been achieved.

As most coal-fired power plants have a long lifespan, any rapid expansion of CCS into the power sector
would include retrofitting. The costs of retrofitting depend much on local circumstances:
A case study from Norway has suggested that a retrofit would reduce efficiency by 3.3% more
than a new integrated system (ref. 8). The average cost of CO2 avoided for retrofits is about 35 %
higher than for new plants. Several factors significantly affect the economics of retrofits,
especially the age, smaller sizes and lower efficiencies typical of existing plants relative to new
builds. The energy requirement for CO2 capture also is usually higher because of less efficient
heat integration for sorbent regeneration (ref. 10).
A case study from Denmark indicates that retrofitting results in very little additional costs and
that the electricity efficiency is only marginally lower compared with new projects (ref. 4).

There are two main methods of CO2 transportation (ref. 14):


Pipeline costs are roughly proportional to distance.
Shipping costs are fairly stable over distance, but have „step-in‟ costs, including a stand-alone
liquefaction unit potentially remote from the power plant. The cost is less dependent on
distance.
For short to medium distances and large volumes, pipelines are therefore by far the most cost-effective
solution.

Pipeline costs may increase in congested and heavily populated areas by 50 to 100 % compared to a
pipeline in remote areas, or when crossing mountains, natural reserves, rivers, roads, etc.; and offshore
pipelines are 40 – 70 % more expensive than similar pipelines built on land (ref. 10).

References
1. Putting Carbon Back in the Ground, IEA Greenhouse Gas R&D Program, February 2001
2. CO2 Capture and Storage in Geological Formations, by Jacek Podkanski, IEA 2003
3. CO2 Capture at Power Stations and Other Major Point Sources, Jacek Podkanski, IEA 2003
4. Vattenfall, 2010.
5. Uncertainties in Relation to CO2 Capture and Sequestration. Preliminary Results, Dolf Gielen,
IEA/EET Working Paper 2003
6. The Future Role of CO2 - Capture and Storage Results of the IEA-ETP Model, Dolf Gielen, 2003
7. www.ieagreen.org.uk
8. “Energy technology perspectives 2008”, International Energy Agency, 2008.
9. “CO2 Capture and Storage. A key carbon abatement option”, the International Energy Agency,
2008.

58
10. “Carbon Dioxide Capture and Storage”, International Panel on Climate Change (IPCC), 2005.
11. “Carbon Sequestration Leadership Forum Technology Roadmap” (CSLF; www.cslforum.org),
2009.
12. DONG Energy, 2009.
13. "The Cost of Carbon Capture and Storage Demonstration Projects in Europe", JRC Scientific and
Technical Reports, European Commission, 2009.
14. "The Costs of CO2 Capture, Transport and Storage", Zero Emissions Platform (ZEP), July 2011.

59
Data sheets
JRC (ref. 13) made a thorough review and analysis of most recent (in 2009) cost assessments of CCS.
As a unique feature, all assumptions are presented in the report. All data on this page are from this
report.

The mentioned reference values are calculated by a weighted average of data from 13 reviewed reports,
the weighting factors determined by the robustness of the reported figures.

The following capture technologies are included:


IGCC-CCS: Integrated Gacification (of coal) Combined Cycle with pre-combustion capture
PF-CCS: Pulverized Fuel (coal) with post-combustion capture
NGCC-CCS: Natural Gas Combined Cycle with post-combustion capture
Oxyfuel: Oxyfuel combustion with post-combustion capture

IGCC-CCS PF-CCS Oxyfuel NGCC-CCS


Electricity efficiency
Low % 32 29 35 45
High % 35 43 41 47
Reference value % 35 35 35 46

All plants have a net capacity of 400 MW, and all costs are in Euro 2008:

Carbon capture
IGCC-CCS PF-CCS Oxyfuel NGCC-CCS
Specific investment cost
Low M€/MW 1.835 1.641 2.122 0.937
High M€/MW 3.241 3.710 4.279 1.766
Reference cost M€/MW 2.7 2.5 2.9 1.3
Fixed O&M cost
Low €/MW/year 60000 42000 44000 27000
High €/MW/year 86000 80000 104000 56000
Reference cost €/MW/year 75000 65000 90000 38000
Variable O&M cost
Low €/MWh 1.6 3.7 0.1 0.6
High €/MWh 2.9 5.8 3.6 1.2
Reference cost €/MWh 2.1 4.5 0.9 0.9
CO2 transport and storage
Low €/tonnne 5
High €/tonnne 40
Reference cost €/tonnne 20

JRC calculated the costs of CCS plants including pipelines and storage compared to reference state-of-
the-art conventional plants that use the same fuel and are of the same net electricity output. The average
costs per tonne of CO2 avoided for the coal-fired CCS plants and the NGCC-CCS plant were 87 €/t and
118 €/t respectively.

60
The below table, in the same format as other technologies in this report, has been developed using other
sources than the above-referenced JRC-report.

Technology CO2 capture (post-combustion),


pulverized coal power plant
2010 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit (MW) 500 - 740 1+2+3+4
Capture efficiency (%) 90 90 90 90 A 1
Generation efficiency decrease (%-points) 8-10% 8-10% 8-10% 8-10% B 1+2+3

Financial data
Capture, post-combustion
Nominal investment (M€/MW) 2.3-4.3 3.07 3.00 2.86 C 1+2+3+4;
2;2;2
Fixed O&M (€/MW/year) 72000- 72000- 72000- 72000- D 1+2
87000 87000 87000 87000
Variable O&M (€/MWh) 3.4-4.1 3.4-4.1 3.4-4.1 3.4-4.1 D 1+2

References:
1 "The Costs of CO2 Capture, Transport and Storage", Zero Emissions Platform (ZEP), July 2011
2 "UK Electricity Generation Costs Update", Mott MacDonald, June 2010.
3 "Energy Technology Perspectives", IEA 2010
4 "ProjectCosts of generating Electricity", IEA & NEA, 2010
Notes:
A The non-captured CO2 is released into the atmosphere.
B Some of the electricity consumption may be regained as useful heat. The displayed efficiency decreases
do most probably take the usage of heat into account.
C The nominal investment is per net generating capacity, i.e. after deducting the power consumed for CO2
capture. If you compare two power plants, with CCS (this element) and without CCS (element 01), and
with the same net power generating capacity, the difference in nominal investment (e.g. 3.07-2.03 = 1.04
M€/MW in 2020) is the value of the capture equipment. If CO2 capture is added on to an existing power
plant, the loss in generating capacity shall be taken into account.
D The O&M costs are per net generating capacity and net generation, i.e. after deducting the power
consumer for CO2 capture.

The ZEP report (ref. 14) is probably the most complete analysis of CO2 transport costs to date. The
report describes three methods of transportation and for each of these present detailed cost elements
and key cost drivers. The three methods are:
Onshore pipeline transport
Offshore pipeline transport
Ship transport, including utilities.

61
The following table shows the unit transportation cost (EUR/tonne) for such projects, depending on
transport method and distance, and with typical capacities in million tonnes per annum (Mtpa):

Typical capacity of 2.5 Mtpa, 'point-to-point' connections


Distance km 180 500 750 1500
Onshore pipe €/tonne 5.4 n.a. n.a. n.a.
Offshore pipe €/tonne 9.3 20.4 28.7 51.7
Ship €/tonne 8.2 9.5 10.6 14.5
Liquafaction (for ship transport) €/tonne 5.3 5.3 5.3 5.3
Typical capacity of 20 Mtpa, 'point-to-point' connections
Distance km 180 500 750 1500
Onshore pipe €/tonne 1.5 3.7 5.3 n.a.
Offshore pipe €/tonne 3.4 6.0 8.2 16.3
Ship (including liquefaction) €/tonne 11.1 12.2 13.2 16.1

The ZEP report (ref. 14) also provides an update on storage costs:

Cost range (€/tonne CO2 stored)


Case
Low Medium High
Onshore Depleted oil and gas fields Existing well 1 3 7
Onshore Depleted oil and gas fields New well 1 4 10
Onshore Saline aquifer New well 2 5 12
Offshore Depleted oil and gas fields Existing well 2 6 9
Offshore Depleted oil and gas fields New well 3 10 14
Offshore Saline aquifer New well 6 14 20

62
08 WASTE-TO-ENERGY CHP PLANT

Brief technology description


The major components are: A waste reception area, a feeding system, a grate fired furnace
interconnected with a steam boiler, a back pressure steam turbine, a generator, an extensive flue gas
cleaning system and systems for handling of combustion and flue gas treatment residues.

The plant is primarily designed for incineration of municipal solid waste (MSW) and similar non-
hazardous wastes from trade and industry. Some types of hazardous wastes may, however, also be
incinerated.

The waste is delivered by trucks and is normally incinerated in the state in which it arrives. Only bulky
items are shredded before being fed into the waste bunker.

The design and operation of MSW plants varies greatly. For example, in Sweden and Denmark,
revenues gained from the combined sales of district heat and electricity enable relatively low gate fees.
In other countries, support for electricity production has encouraged electrical recovery ahead of heat
recovery, e.g. UK, Italy, and Spain (ref. 2).

Input
MSW and other combustible wastes, water and chemicals for flue gas treatment, gasoil or natural gas
for auxiliary burners (if installed), and in some cases biomass for starting and closing down.

In Copenhagen, the heating value for MSW has increased from 9.8 MJ/kg in 2004 to 10.5 MJ/kg in
2008 and is expected to further increase to 11.5-12 MJ/kg by 2025. However, the heating value may
decrease, if large amounts of combustible fractions are sorted out.

Output
Electricity and heat as hot (> 110 oC) or warm (<110 oC) water, bottom ash (slag), residues from flue
gas treatment, including fly ash. If the flue gas is treated by wet methods, there may also be an output
of treated or untreated process wastewater (the untreated wastewater originates from the SO2-step,
when gypsum is not produced).

Typical capacities
About 35 tonnes of waste per hour, corresponding to a thermal input of 100 - 120 MJ/s.

Regulation ability
The plants can be down regulated to about 50% of the nominal capacity, under which limit the boiler
may not be capable of providing adequate steam quality and environmental performance. For emissions
control reasons and due to high initial investments they should be operated as base load.

63
Advantages/disadvantages
By incinerating the non-recyclable, combustible waste its energy content is utilised thereby replacing
equivalent quantities of energy generated on fossil fuels. Moreover, the waste is sterilised, and its
volume greatly reduced. The remaining waste (bottom ash/slag) may be utilised in construction works,
and it will no longer generate methane. Consequently, by incinerating the waste, the methane emission
generated, when landfilling the same quantity of waste, is avoided.

The disadvantages are that a polluted, corrosive flue gas is formed, requiring extensive treatment, and
that the flue gas treatment generates residues, which are classified as hazardous waste. The corrosive
nature of the flue gas limits the permissible steam data to 40 - 65 bar and 400 - 425 oC and hence the
electrical efficiency to around 20 - 25%.

Environment
The incineration of MSW involves the generation of climate-relevant emissions. These are mainly
emissions of CO2 as well as N2O, NOx and NH3. CH4 is not generated in waste incineration during
normal operation.

Waste is a mixture of CO2 neutral biomass and products of fossil origin, such as plastics. A typical CO2
emission factor is 37.0 kg/GJ for the waste mixture currently incinerated in Denmark.

To comply with European Union requirements (Directive 2000/76) the flue gas must be heated to min.
850 oC for min. 2 seconds and the gas must be treated for NOx, dust (fly ash), HCl, HF, SO2, dioxins
and heavy metals. If HCl, HF and SO2 are removed by wet processes, the wastewater must be treated to
fulfil some specific water emission limit values.

The solid residues from flue gas and water treatment are hazardous wastes and are often placed in an
underground storage for hazardous waste (cf. Council Decision 2003/33).

Ecological footprints are: air and water emissions including dioxins as well as solid residues to be
disposed of.

Research and development


The electrical efficiency may be increased with higher steam temperature and pressure. However, this
may harm the super-heater, which may be corroded by chloride and other aggressive ingredients in the
flue gas, thereby decreasing the operational availability. Simple solutions, which are common in the
U.S.A., are to refurbish the super-heater regularly, or to protect the super-heater with a layer of Inconell
(also used on panels in the furnace). Another solution is to use a clean fuel (e.g. natural gas or self-
produced gas) for heating an external super-heater.

A newly developed solution (developed by company Babcock & Wilcox Vølund) is to install a
partition wall in the combustion chamber, separating the flue gas into two streams, an aggressive and a
non-aggressive flow. The latter is used to heat an additional super-heater, operating at a higher
temperature, thus increasing the electricity efficiency by 3-6 percentage-points.

64
Further challenges are the amount and quality of the residues (bottom ash, fly ash and flue gas cleaning
residue).

Similarly, the amount of hazardous waste (fly ash and flue gas cleaning residue) may be reduced by
optimisation of the overall process. Also, treatment of residues may be further developed for recycling
and/or disposal in landfills not dedicated for hazardous waste.

Examples of best available technology


The Afval Energie Bedrijf in Amsterdam is the largest incineration plant in the world (1.5 million
tonnes per year). The most recent extension (2007) involved 2 units of 34 tonnes/hour, steam data 440
o
C and 130 bar, which together with steam re-heating results in an electricity efficiency of 30% (ref. 4).
These units do not produce district heat, thus enabling a higher electricity efficiency than combined
heat and power plants.

The most energy-efficient plant in Denmark, Reno-Nord Unit 4, was commissioned in 2005. The
capacity is 20 tonnes/hour, steam data 425 oC and 50 bar. Gross electricity efficiency 26.8%, net
electricity efficiency 23.2%.

Special remarks
Contrary to other fuels used for energy generation, waste has a negative price and is received at a gate
fee. The primary objective of a waste-to-energy plant is the treatment of waste, energy production may
be considered a useful by-product.

By condensing most of the water vapour content of the flue gas in the flue gas treatment, a thermal
efficiency (based on the net calorific value) of around 100% is achievable. At the same time the plant
becomes self-sufficient in water.

The following table (ref. 2) illustrates how the capital costs of a new MSW incineration plant vary with
the flue-gas and residue treatment processes applied (data from Germany, 2003):

References:
1. National Environmental Research Institute, Denmark, 2008.
2. ‟Reference Document on the Best Available Techniques for Waste Incineration‟ (BREF),
European Commission, August 2006.
3. IPCC Good Practice Guidance and Uncertainty Management in National Greenhouse Gas
Inventories, 2000.
4. http://www.afvalenergiebedrijf.nl/main.asp?wpl_id=55356

65
Data sheet

Technology Waste to energy CHP plant


2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Waste treatment capacity (tonnes/hr) 25 - 35 A
Total efficiency (%) gross 101 100 100 100 B+C 4
Total efficiency (%) net 98 97 97 97 B+C 4
Electricity efficiency (%) gross 28 30 30 30 C 4
Electricity efficiency (%) net 24 26 26 26 C 4
Time for varm start-up (hours) 12 12 12 1
Forced outage (%) 1 1 1 1
Planned outage (weeks per year) 3 3 3 1
Technical lifetime (years) 20 20 20 1
Construction time (years) 3 3 3 1
Environment
SO2 (degree of desulphurisation, %) 98.2 98.4 98.4 1
NOX (g per GJ fuel) 124 30 30 30 C+F 2;3;3;3
CH4 (g per GJ fuel) 0.59 0.59 0.59 0.59 2;4;4;4
N2O (g per GJ fuel) 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 2;4;4;4
Financial data
Specific investment (M€ per tonnes/hr) 4.7-6.8 4.7-6.8 4.7-6.8 4.7-6.8 C+D+E+ 4
Specific investment (M€/MW) 7 - 10 7 - 10 7 - 10 7 - 10 G
C+E+G 4
Total O&M (€/tonne) 53 53 53 53 H 6;4;4;4
Regulation ability
Minimum load (% of full load) 75 75 75 1

References:
1 Rambøll Danmark, 2004
2 National Environmental Research Institute, Denmark, 2009 (data from 2007).
3 "En opdateret analyse af Danmarks muligheder for at reducere emissionerne af NOx" (Updated analysis of Denmark's
options to reduce NOx emissions; in Danish), Danish Environmental Protection Agency, 2009.
4 Danish Energy Agency and Energinet.dk, 2011.
5 Affald Danmark (association of waste management companies), 2009.
6 "BEATE. Benchmarking the waste management sector 2011" (in Danish), report delivered by waste management and
industrial associations to the Danish Environment Protection Agency, 2011.
Notes:
A tph = tonnes per hour (incineration capacity).
B With flue gas condensation and without the use of cooling towers to dismiss surplus heat during the summer. In
Denmark, the actual annual efficiency is around 93%.
C From 2020 application of the SCR-process (selective catalytic reduction) is assumed for NOx reduction (not a legal
requirement in Denmark). This implies additional investment and O&M costs, energy use for heating the flue gas and
electricity loss due to increased pressure loss. The electricity efficiency is typically reduced by about 1%, while the total
efficiency is reduced by about 2.5%. These impacts are included in the forecasted values for those parameters.
D Since electricity generation is only a secondary objective of waste incineration, it may make more sense to relate the
total investment to the incineration capacity, e.g. in tonnes per hour (tph), rather than the electricity generation capacity.
E Total costs are included, including the ones relating to waste treatment and heat production.
F Measured data on 8 plants in 2008 revealed Nox emissions between 80 and 180 g/GJ (ref. 5).
G Cost data are the same as in the 2010 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2008 to 2011 by multiplying by a
factor 1.0478.
H The quoted figure is the average total O&M for plants established in Denmark since 1999. The analysis revealed an
economy-of-scale (between 50,000 and 250,000 tonnes/year): O&M (€/tonne) = 100 - 0.00025*V, where V is annually
treated waste volume, in tonnes per year (ref. 6).

66
09 BIOMASS CHP, STEAM TURBINE, MEDIUM - SMALL

Brief technology description


The major components are: Fuel treatment and feed-in system, high-pressure steam boiler, steam
turbine, generator and flue-gas heat recovery boiler (hot water or steam).

Combustion can be applied for biomass feedstock with moisture contents up to 60%.

Straw is usually delivered in 500 kg Hesston bales (15 GJ/tonnes) to the CHP plant. Compared to coal
the energy density is about 9 times lower. The bales are most commonly shredded and fed by stoker
screws.

Forest residues are typically delivered as wood chips. Both straw and wood residues may also be
delivered as pellets.

The furnace technology can be of different nature: Grate firing, suspension firing (where the biomass is
pulverized or chopped and blown into the furnace, possibly in combination with a fossil fuel), and
fluidised bed. Grate combustion is very robust with regard to using varying types of biomass.

The data sheet describes plants used for combined production of electricity and district heat. These data
do not apply for industrial plants, which typically deliver heat at higher temperatures than district
heating plants, and therefore they have lower electricity efficiencies. Also, industrial plants are often
cheaper in initial investment and O&M, among others because they are designed for shorter technical
lifetimes, with less redundancy, low-cost buildings etc.

Input
Biomass; e.g. residues from wood industries, wood chips (collected in forests), peat, straw and energy
crops. However, please refer to Technology sheet 01, if wood pellets are the only fuel.

Wood is usually the most favourable biomass for combustion due to its low content of ash and
nitrogen. Herbaceous biomass like straw and miscanthus have higher contents of N, S, K, Cl etc. that
leads to higher emissions of NOx and particulates, increased ash, corrosion and slag deposits.

The amount of biomass available for energy production varies over time. From 1997 to 2006, the
Danish straw production varied between 5.2 and 6.8 million tonnes per year, while the amount used for
energy varied between 1.0 and 1.5 million tonnes.

Output
Electricity and heat. The heat may come as steam or hot water.

Typical capacities
Medium: 10 – 50 MW.
Small: 1 – 10 MW.

67
The capacities of cogeneration plants supplying heat to district heating systems are primarily
determined by the heat demands.

Regulation ability
The plants can be down regulated, but due to high initial investments they should be operated in base
load.

Advantages/disadvantages
Some biomass resources, in particular straw, contain aggressive components such as chlorine. To avoid
or reduce the risk of slagging and corrosion, boiler manufacturers have traditionally deterred from
applying steam data to biomass-fired plants at the same level as coal-fired plants. However, recent
advances in materials and boiler design constitute a breakthrough, and the newest plants have fairly
high steam data and efficiencies.

In the low capacity range (less than 10 MW) the scale of economics is quite considerable.

Environment
The main ecological footprints from biomass combustion are persistent toxicity, climate change, and
acidification. However, the footprints are small (ref. 1).

Research and development


Focus of the Danish R&D strategy:
Reduce the cost of fuel, by improved pre-treatment, better characterisation and measurement
methods.
Reduce corrosion, in particular high-temperature corrosion
Reduce slagging
Reduced emissions
Recycling of ashes
Improved trouble-shooting

Examples of best available technology


Fyn Power Plant (Denmark), Unit 8; commissioned in 2009; 35 MW electricity; 84 MJ/s district
heat. 170,000 tonnes of straw per year.
Ensted Power Plant (Denmark); commissioned 1998; separate biomass-fired boiler supplying steam
in parallel with a coal-fired unit; 120,000 tonnes of straw and 30,000 tons of wood chips per year.

Additional remarks
The data sheets for small plants indicate that wood-fired plants have lower electricity efficiencies than
straw-fired plants. This has no reason in technology constraints, but reflects the fact that the
development of straw-fired plants has been driven by power utilities focusing on high efficiencies.

68
References

1. ”Life cycle assessment of Danish electricity and cogeneration”, Energinet.dk, DONG Energy
and Vattenfall, April 2010.

Data sheets
Technology
Medium steam turbine, woodchips

2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref


Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit (MW) 10 - 50
Electricity efficiency (%) net 29 29 29 2
Heat efficiency (%) net; without flue gas 64 2
condensation
Heat efficiency (%) net; with flue gas 77 2
condensation
Availability (%) 90 90 90 1
Technical lifetime (years) 30 30 30 1
Construction time (years) 4.5 4.5 4.5 1
Environment
SO2 (g per GJ fuel) 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 3;2;2;2
NOX (g per GJ fuel) 81 81 81 81 3;2;2;2
Unburned hydrocarbon, UHC (g per GJ fuel) 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 3;2;2;2
N2O (g per GJ fuel) 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 3;2;2;2
Financial data
Specific investment (M€/MW) 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 4;2;2;2
Fixed O&M (€/MW/year) 29000 29000 29000 29000 B 1;2;2;2
Variable O&M (€/MWh) 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 B 1;2;2;2
Regulation ability
Regulation speed (MW per min.) 4 4 4 1
Minimum load (% of full load) 20 20 20 1

References:
1 Energi E2, October 2004
2 Danish Energy Agency and Energinet.dk, 2011.
3 "Emisions map for combined heat and power production 2007", National Environmental Research
Institute, Denmark, 2010.
4 Ramboll Denmark, 2011
Notes:
A The Cb values have been calculated from the electricity efficiencies in condensation mode, the Cv
values and a total efficiency (electricity plus heat with fluegas condensation) in full back-pressure
mode of 103 %. Cf. Annex 1.
B Cost data are the same as in the 2005 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2002 to 2011 by
multiplying with a general inflation factor 1.2306

69
Technology
Small steam turbine, back-pressure, woodchips
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit (MW) 0.6 - 4.3

Total efficiency (%) net 103 103 103 A 1


Electricity efficiency (%) net - 100% load 25 25 25 1
Time for varm start-up (hours) 3 3
Cb (50 oC/100 oC) 0.3 0.3 0.3
Availability (%) 90 -92 90 -92 90 -92 1
Technical lifetime (years) 20 20 20 4
Construction time (years) 2-3 2-3 2-3 4
Environment
SO2 (g per GJ fuel) 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 7;6;6;6
NOX (g per GJ fuel) 81 81 81 81 7;6;6;6
Unburned hydrocarbon, UHC (g per GJ 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 7;6;6;6
fuel)
N2O (g per GJ fuel) 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 7;6;6;6
Financial data
Nominal investment (M€/MW) 3.6-4.9 3-4 3-4 3-4 B;C 1
Total O&M (% of investment per year) 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 1

References:
1 Danish Energy Agency, 2010
2 Elforsk: ”El från nya anläggningar”, Stockholm, 2000.
3 Danish Technology Institute: "Udvikling af computerbaseret værktøj, energyPRO, til simulering og
optimering af driftsstrategi for biobrændselsfyrede kraftvarmeværker", 2001
4 Elkraft System, October 2003 and September 2004
6 Danish Energy Agency and Energinet.dk, 2011.
7 "Emisions map for combined heat and power production 2007", National Environmental
Research Institute, Denmark, 2010.
Notes:
A Flue-gas condensation
B A cost reduction of 2 % per year cost is assumed
C Cost data are the same as in the 2005 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2002 to 2011
by multiplying by a factor 1.2306.

70
Technology
Medium steam turbine, straw

2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref


Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit (MW) 10 - 50
Electricity efficiency (%) net - 100% load 29 1
Heat efficiency (%) net; without flue gas 64 1
condensation
Heat efficiency (%) net; with flue gas condensation 72 1
Technical lifetime (years) 25 3
Construction time (years)
Environment
SO2 (g per GJ fuel) 49 49 49 49 4;3;3;3
NOX (g per GJ fuel) 125 125 125 125 4;3;3;3
Unburned hydrocarbon, UHC (g per GJ fuel) 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 4;3;3;3
N2O (g per GJ fuel) 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 4;3;3;3
Financial data
Specific investment (M€/MW) 4.0 A 1
Fixed O&M (€/MW/year) 40000 B 3
Variable O&M (€/MWh) 6.4 B 3

References:
1 Presentation on Fyn Power Plant, Unit 8 (36 MW el with flue-gas condensation) by Vattenfall , October 2006
2 "Potential contribution of bioenergy to the World's future energy demand", International Energy Agency, 2007.
3 Danish Energy Agency and Energinet.dk, 2011.
4 "Emisions map for combined heat and power production 2007", National Environmental Research Institute,
Denmark, 2010.
Notes:
A 40 % has been added to the 2006 cost, due to the general price jump for steam power plants during and
after the global financial crisis 2007-2009.
B O&M data are the same as in the 2010 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2008 to 2011 by multiplying
with a general inflation factor 1.053

71
Technology
Small steam turbine, back-pressure, straw
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit (MW) 8 - 10
Total efficiency (%) net 90 90 90 1
Electricity efficiency (%) net 29 - 30 29 - 30 29 - 30 1
Time for varm start-up (hours) 2 3
Availability (%) 91 91 91 2
Planned outage (weeks per year)
Technical lifetime (years) 20 20 20 4
Construction time (years) 2-3 2-3 2-3 2
Environment
SO2 (g per GJ fuel) 49 49 49 49 6;5;5;5
NOX (g per GJ fuel) 125 125 125 125 6;5;5;5
Unburned hydrocarbon, UHC (g per GJ fuel) 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 6;5;5;5
N2O (g per GJ fuel) 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 6;5;5;5
Financial data
Nominal investment (M€/MW) 4.5-5.8 4.0-5.2 4.0-5.2 4.0-5.2 A;B 1
Total O&M (% of investment per year) 4 4 4 4 1
Total O&M (€/MW/year)

References:
1 Danish Energy Agency, 2004
2 Elsam's and Elkraft's update of the Danish Energy Authority's 'Teknologidata for el- og
varmeproduktionsanlæg', 1997
3 Danish Technology Institute: "Udvikling af computerbaseret værktøj, energyPRO, til simulering og
optimering af driftsstrategi for biobrændselsfyrede kraftvarmeværker", 2001
4 Elkraft System, October 2003
5 Danish Energy Agency and Energinet.dk, 2011.
6 "Emisions map for combined heat and power production 2007", National Environmental Research
Institute, Denmark, 2010.
Notes:
A A cost reduction of 2 % per year cost is assumed
B 40 % has been added to the 2004 cost, due to the general price jump for steam power plants
during and after the global financial crisis 2007-2009.

72
10 STIRLING ENGINES, GASIFIED BIOMASS

Brief technology description


A Stirling engine is driven by temperature differences created by external heating and cooling sources.
One part of the engine is permanently hot, while another part of the engine is permanently cold.

The engine is filled with a working gas, typically Hydrogen or Helium, and pressurized. This working
gas is moved between the hot and the cold side of the engine by a mechanical system comprising of a
displacement piston coupled to a working piston. When the working gas is heated in the hot side of the
engine, it expands and pushes the working piston. When the working piston moves, the displacement
piston then forces the working gas to the cold side of the engine, where it cools and contracts.

In the biomass-gasifier solution developed by the company Stirling DK, the engine is Helium-filled,
heated by biomass combustion flue gasses, and cooled by cooling water.

Specifically, a solid biomass fuel is converted into producer gas, which is led to one or more
combustion chambers, each coupled to a Stirling engine. The gas is ignited in the combustion
chamber(s), and the flue gases are heating the Stirling engine(s), which is driving an electricity
generator.

For a more detailed description of the gasifier process, please refer to technology no. 84.

Input
Wood chips, industrial wood residues, demolition wood and energy crops can be used. Also, it is
expected that more exotic fuel types, such as coconut shells and olive stones, can be used.
Requirements to moisture content and size of the fuel are depending on the design of the gasifier.

The Stirling engines can also be fuelled by natural gas and mineral oil.

Output
Electricity and heat.

The electricity efficiency, when using wood chips, is around 18%.

Typical capacities
The electric output of one Stirling engine is 35 kW. For plants with several engines, one common
gasifier is used.

Regulation ability
The heat load can be changed from 10 to 100 % and vice versa within a few minutes. The electrical
output can not be regulated quickly.

73
Advantages/disadvantages
The main advantage of the Stirling engine is that it can generate power using residues from forestry and
agriculture, which typically have a very low economic value. In addition, emission levels are very low.
Finally, the service requirement of a Stirling engine is very low compared to otto- and diesel-engines.

The main disadvantage is a relatively high capital cost compared to otto- and diesel-engines.

Stirling engines are therefore ideally used for base load generation with many annual operating hours,
preferable 6-8,000 hours/year.

Environment
A highly controlled gasification process together with the continuous combustion process secure much
lower air emissions than otto- and diesel-engines.

Research, development and demonstration


The Danish Stirling engine updraft-gasifier technology is presently being supported in two projects:
A multi-unit system with two engines and a wood gas boiler (for heat only) on one common
updraft gasifier, is being developed, supported by PSO-means. Also a new combustion
technology, high efficiency, is being developed under this program.
A containerized plant has been built, supported by EUDP-means. In order to demonstrate fuel
flexibility, the plant will be tested with 8 different fuel types. Also, an off-grid solution will be
developed.

Examples of best available technology


Examples of plants in Denmark:
o In Svanholm, an 800 kJ/s updraft counter-current fixed bed gasifier was installed in 2009. The
gasifier utilises wood chips and is coupled to two 35 kW Stirling engines and a 400 kJ/s wood
gas boiler.
o In both Copenhagen and Lyngby, a 200 kJ/s updraft counter-current fixed bed gasifier was
installed in 2009. Each gasifier utilises wood chips and is coupled to one 35 kW Stirling engine.

References
1. Biomasse kraftvarme udviklingskortlægning – Resume-rapport. Eltra. Elkraft System. Danish
Energy Agency, 2003
2. Strategi for forskning, udvikling og demonstration af biomasseteknologi til el- og
kraftvarmeproduktion i Danmark, Danish Energy Agency, Elkraft System og Eltra, 2003.
3. Stirling DK, December 2009.

74
Data sheet

Technology
Stirling engine, fired by gasified biomass
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity electric, (kW) 37 40 1
Generating capacity, heat, (kJ/s) 120 120 1
Electrical efficiency (%) 20 22 A 1
Time for wam-up (hours) 1 1 1
Forces outage (%) 4 3 1
Planned outage (weeks per year) 3 2 1
Technical lifetime (years) 15 15 1
Construction time (years) 0 0.3 B 1
Environment
SO2 (degree of desulphuring, %) 0 0 1
NOx (ppm) 130 100 1
CH4 (ppm) 0 0 1
N20 (ppm) 0 0 1
Financial data
Specific investment costs (M€/MW) 5.0 3.8 C+E 1
Fixed O&M (€/MW/year) 32000 32000 D+E 1
Variable O&M (€/MWh) 26 21 D+E 1

References:
1 Stirling DK, December 2009
Notes:
A The efficiency of the gasifier is 97%, while the total efficiency for the whole system is 90%
(2020).
B The plants may be delivered as pre-assembled container solutions reducing construction
times on site to a couple of weeks.
C Complete plant, including gasifier, combustion chambers, engines, control system,
piping, and instrumentation.
D O&M for the Stirling engine itself is (2010) around 16 €/MWh, while the remianing O&M
costs are for biomass feeding, gasification, heat exchangers etc.
E Cost data are the same as in the 2010 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2008
to 2011 by multiplying with a general inflation factor 1.053

75
20 WIND TURBINES ON-SHORE

Brief technology description


Today, the most typical large wind turbine is the three-bladed propeller-type rotor on a horizontal axis,
placed on the upwind side of a tubular steel tower, electricity producing and grid connected. Most
often, they are pitch regulated.

In recent years gearless wind turbines with compact multi-pole permanent-magnet synchronous
generators have been installed.

On-shore wind turbines are installed either as single turbines, in small clusters or in wind farms with a
large number of turbines.

Input
Minimum wind speed: 3-4 m/s.
Rated power generation is reached at around 10 to 12 m/s wind speed.
Maximum operational wind speed: Approx. 25 m/s.

The seasonal variation of the energy content in winds over Denmark is shown in the below figure (ref.
4):

The blue curve (centre, with data labels) shows the average of the monthly averages over a 10-year
period in per cent of annual average. The green (upper) curve shows the maximum monthly average
values, while the red (lower) curve shows the minimum monthly average values.

During 2003 – 2008 the annual averages varied between 85 % and 107 % of a normal year.

76
Output
Electricity.

Typical capacities
Electricity generating on-shore wind turbines on-shore can typically be categorised according to
nominal electrical power and application:

Large wind turbines: 800 – 4000 kW


Small wind turbines: 1 – 25 kW
Stand alone wind turbines 5 - 500 kW
(only few exist in DK):
Battery chargers: 0.5 - 5 kW

For various environmental planning reasons, it is expected that that wind turbines installed on-shore in
Denmark will be below 150 metres (highest point of rotor), except in remote areas and special selected
test sites. This typically corresponds to a generation capacity of approx. 4 MW (ref. 10).

Regulation ability
Wind energy is a fluctuating energy source depending on the energy in the wind. Wind energy can
participate in the regulation and balancing of the grid.

Advantages/disadvantages
Advantages:
No emissions
Stable and predictable costs; in particular due to no fuel costs and low operating costs
Modular technology - capacity can be expanded according to demand. This saves systems
overbuilds and avoids stranded debts.

Disadvantages:
High initial investment costs
Generation dependent of the wind (however, there is some correlation between electricity
demand and wind energy generation).
Aspects of visual impact
Noise (in some cases)

Environment
Wind energy is a clean energy source. The main environmental concerns are visual impact, flickering
(rapid shifts between shadow and light), noise and the risk of bird-collisions. Today noise is dealt with
in the planning phase and normally it poses little problems to build wind turbines close to human
settlements. The visual effects of wind turbine may, however, create some controversy. In general birds
are able to navigate around the turbines in a wind farm and recent studies report very low bird mortality
numbers in the order of 0.1 to 0.6 birds per turbine per year (ref. 9).

The energy payback time is 6 – 8 months (ref. 1 and 2).

77
The main ecological footprint from on-shore wind turbines is hazardous waste; i.e. from steel
production and powder lacquering the tower (ref. 1 and 2).

Research and development


R&D potential:
Reduced investment costs by improving the design methods for up-scaling and the physical
models of structural design, aero-elastic and other material properties, load and safety and
interactions with the energy systems
Increased length of blades (includes aerodynamics, strength, safety and materials)
Reduced costs of power electronics
More efficient transmission and conversion system
Reduced operational and maintenance costs
Improvement of wind turbine component reliability
Power grid integration
Facilities for wind turbine testing, component testing, and grid connection compliance and
validation testing
More efficient methods to determine wind resources, incl. external design conditions, e.g.
normal and extreme wind conditions
Tools for wind power forecasting; incl. boundary surface meteorology
New control elements
Improved electrical storage techniques
Public attitudes and visual impact

Furthermore, novel technologies may be developed and tested, such as DC generators, or


superconducting generators, based on so-called high-temperature superconductor materials (operating
at or above 77oK, the boiling point of Nitrogen; described in ref. 4).

Additional remarks
The average annual capacity factor depends on the local wind resource, but also much on how the
turbines are configured. Besides the hub height, an important parameter is the specific power, i.e.
generator capacity divided by rotor area (W/m2). This is illustrated in the following table, which shows
the generation from two equal turbines, same rotor, but different generators:

Generator, MW 1.8 3.0


Annual generation, MWh/year 5400 6000
Average annual plant
capacity factor 0.34 0.23

The larger and thus more expensive generator obviously generates more energy, but the capacity factor
is less. A high capacity factor is beneficial for the overall electricity system, and may also be the most
attractive solution for the wind turbine owner, depending on price mechanisms and subsidies.

78
The impact of specific power on the capacity factor (here annual energy production, AEP) is also
illustrated below (ref. 3):

Thus, 15% more rotor area per MW yields about 12-13% more production per MW for a typical Danish
site. For Danish wind turbines, the specific power has decreased substantially in recent years, from
about 420 W/m2 during 1990-2005 to about 350 W/m2 for modern turbines (ref. 3).

The Danish average for on-shore turbines 2006-2008 (corrected to a normal wind year) was 2020 hours
(ref. 12).

Turbine prices have risen about 20% from 2004 to 2007 (ref. 6). “The weakness of the dollar, rising
material costs, a concerted movement towards increased manufacturer profitability, and a shortage of
components and turbines continued to put upward pressure on wind turbine costs, and therefore wind
power prices in 2006” (ref. 7). 2006 order books were filled up for 1.5 to 2 years ahead for all the
leading suppliers (ref. 8).

Since 2001, installed wind capacity worldwide has grown by 20% to 30% a year, and the global
capacity is forecasted to increase from 94 GW to 1360-2010 GW in 2050 (ref. 6). This is equivalent to
an average increase of 6-8% per annum. With such increases, the future price development is much
dependant on, when supply capacity will be able to balance market pull. Thus, the market imbalance
(or business bubble) may for several years be more important for the price formation than technological
advances.

The European Wind Energy Association (EWEA) expects that balance between demand and supply for
wind turbines will be achieved around 2015 – 2018. EWEA anticipates a growth in installed capacity in
EU of 2.9% per year from 2020 to 2050 (ref. 13).

79
Capital costs of wind energy projects are dominated by the price of the wind turbine itself. The below
table shows the cost structure for a medium sized turbine (850 kW to 1500 kW), based on data from
UK, Spain, Germany and Denmark (ref. 9):

Share of Share of
total cost other
(%) costs (%)
Turbine, ex works 74-82 -
Foundation 1-6 20-25
Electric installation 1-9 10-15
Grid-connection 1-9 35-45
Land 1-3 5-10
Road construction 1-5 5-10
Consultancy 1-3 5-10
Financial costs 1-5 5-10

„Ex works‟ means that no balance of plant, i.e. site work, foundation, or grid connection costs are
included. Ex works costs include the turbine as provided by the manufacturer, including the turbine
itself, blades, tower, and transport to the site.

The incremental cost of increasing the generation capacity with unchanged rotor is determined by the
generator, gear, transformer and possibly grid connection. These costs constitute up to 20% of total
turbine cost. Thus, doubling the generation capacity increases the total cost by approx. 20% (ref. 11).

The split of O&M costs have been studied in Germany and Denmark (ref. 9), here shown in percent of
total O&M costs:

Germany Denmark
Land rent 18
Insurance 13 35
Regular service 28
26
Repair and spare parts 12
Power from the grid 5
Administration 21 11
Miscellaneous 17 14

Small wind turbines


Very small wind turbines have special features. They can roughly be classified in two categories (ref.
5):
HAWT (Horizontal Axis Wind Turbine)
VAWT (Vertical Axis Wind Turbine)

The traditional three blade HAWT is said to be highly dependent on “quality wind” with a minimum of
turbulence and variation. The producers of VAWT claim that their turbines are less sensitive to wind

80
turbulence and changing wind directions. Thus, the VAWT appears most suitable for households and
buildings in urban areas, while the HAWT is more appropriate for rural areas.

Noise and vibrations from building mounted turbines have yet to be solved. The Danish noise limits for
micro turbines are 39 dB at a wind speed of 8 m/s and 37 dB at a wind speed of 6 m/s (ref. 5).

References
1. “Life cycle assessment of offshore and onshore sited wind power plants based on Vestas V90-3.0
MW turbines”, Vestas Wind Systems, July 2006.
2. “Life cycle assessment of electricity produced from onshore sited wind power plants based on
Vestas V82-1.65 MW turbines”, Vestas Wind Systems, December 2006.
3. "Input data to technology catalogue for wind turbines", prepared by project 'Economy of wind
turbines 2007-2009', with major Danish stakeholders as participants. P. Nielsen, EMD
International, et al, October 2009.
4. www.naturlig-energi.dk
5. “Minivindmøller i København” (Mini wind turbines in Copenhagen; in Danish), Ea Energy
Analysis for Copenhagen Municipality, November 2009.
6. “Energy technology perspectives 2008”, International Energy Agency, 2008.
7. "Annual report on U.S. wind power installation, cost, and performance trends: 2006", US
Department of Energy, May 2007.
8. “International wind energy development. World market update 2006”, BTM Consult, March 2007.
9. “Contribution to the Chapter on Wind Power, Energy Technology Perspectives 2008” (cf. ref. 6),
J. Lemming et al, Risø National Laboratory for Sustainable Energy, Denmark, January 2008.
10. Danish Energy Agency, 2009.
11. DONG Energy, 2009.
12. Energinet.dk, 2009.
13. “Pure power. Wind energy targets for 2020 and 2030”, European Wind Energy Association
(EWEA), November 2009.

81
Data sheets

Technology Large wind turbines on land


2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one 3 3.5 3.5 3.5 A 1
turbine (MW)
Rotor diameter (m) 105 - 125 120 - 140 120 - 140 120 - 140 A 1+2
Hub height (m) 85 90 90 90 A 1
Average annual plant capacity 0.337 0.354 0.365 0.371 B 1
factor
Availability (%) 97 98 98 98 C 1
Technical lifetime (years) 20 20 25 30 D 1
Construction time (years) 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1
Environment
Noise (dbA) at nearest 44 (8 m/s); 42 (6 m/s) E 1
neighbour, open land
Flicker, hours/year at nearest < 10 1
neighbour
Financial data
Specific investment, total costs 1.40 1.32 1.29 1.22 G 1
(M€/MW)
O&M (€/MWh) 14 13 12 12 C+F+ 1
G

References:
1 "Vindmøllers økonomi" (Economy of wind turbines), final report prepared by the project
'Economy of wind turbines 2007-2009', with major Danish stakeholders as participants. P.
Nielsen, EMD International, et al, January 2010.
2 DONG Energy, December 2009.
Notes:
A The turbine size is estimated to increase further the coming 10 years, but for most sites an
upper limit will be seen, partly due to air traffic, but also due to environmental impact.
B The capacity factor is quite site- and technology-specific, cf. above 'Additional remarks'. It is
expected to increase further due to increased hub height and lower specific power from
2010 to 2020. After 2020 only a marginal improvement is expected through technological
refinements.
C More intelligent maintenance programs and improved components are expected. These
also lead to slightly improved availability.
D The life time is expected to increase with better design tools, while there no longer will be
basis for repowering with larger turbines.
E Average values for Denmark 2007, 10 metres above groundlevel.
F Gearbox refurbushment is a major component of O&M costs, in particular for large turbines.
Improved surveillance is expected to lower the cost. Also, gear-less turbines should reduce
the cost substantially.
G Cost data are the same as in the 2010 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2008 to
2011 by multiplying by a factor 1.053

82
Technology Medium-size wind turbines on land
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one 0.85 0.85 0.85 0.85 A 1
turbine (MW)
Rotor diameter (m) 50 50 50 50 A 1
Hub height (m) 55 55 55 55 A 1
Average annual plant capacity 0.303 0.318 0.329 0.334 1
factor
Availability (%) 97 98 98 98 1
Technical lifetime (years) 20 20 25 30 1
Construction time (years) 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1
Environment
Noise (dbA) at nearest 44 (8 m/s); 42 (6 m/s) 1
neighbour, open land
Flicker, hours/year at nearest < 10 1
neighbour
Financial data
Specific investment, total costs 1.40 1.32 1.29 1.22 1
(M€/MW)
O&M (€/MWh) 14 13 12 12 1

References:
1 Danish Energy Agency, November 2011
Notes:
A The maximum height is 80 m. Hence, an Environmental Impact Assessment is not
required (Danish regulation). Also, noise and visual nuasance is less for neighbours.

83
Technology Small wind turbines, grid-connected
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one turbine (Watt) 5000 - 30000 A
Rotor diameter (m) 5 - 15
Hub height (m) 25 - 35
Utilization time (hours/year) 1500 B 2
Technical lifetime (years) 15-25 C 1
Environment
Noise at nearest neighbour, open land
Financial data
Specific investment, total costs (€/Watt) 1.1-3.2 D 1
O&M (€/kWh)

References:
1 "Catalogue of Small Wind Turbines 2009", Nordic Folkecenter for Renewable Energy, April 2009.
2 "Small wind systems. UK market report 2009", Bristish Wind Energy Association (BWEA), 2009.
Notes:
A Several small wind turbines are stand-alone DC-generating types. This data sheet covers merely AC-
generating turbines.
B Estimated total installed capacity of turbines between 1.5 and 10 kW in UK 2010: 22.6 MW. Estimated
annual generation: 33.65 GWh.
C Information from manufacturers
D Cost data are the same as in the 2010 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2008 to 2011 by
multiplying by a factor 1.053

84
Technology Micro wind turbines, grid-connected
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one turbine (Watt) 200 - 5000 A
Rotor diameter (m) 0.5 - 2.5
Hub height (m) 1 - 25 B
Utilization time (hours/year) 900 C 2
Annual generated electricity (kWh per m2 500 D 3
swept area); mean wind 6 m/s
Annual generated electricity (kWh per m2 100-200 E 3
swept area); mean wind 3-4 m/s
Technical lifetime (years) 15-25 F 1
Environment
Noise at nearest neighbour, open land
Financial data
Specific investment, total costs (€/Watt) 2.1-7.4 G 1+4
O&M (€/kWh) 0.03 G 5

References:
1 "Catalogue of Small Wind Turbines 2009", Nordic Folkecenter for Renewable Energy, April 2009.
2 "Small wind systems. UK market report 2009", Bristish Wind Energy Association (BWEA), 2009.
3 "Mini-vindmøllers elproduktion" (Power generation from micro wind-turbines; in Danish), Risoe National
Laboratory for Sustainable Energy, February 2009.
4 www.allsmallwindturbines.com
5 “Minivindmøller i København” (Mini wind turbines in Copenhagen; in Danish), Ea Energy Analysis for
Copenhagen Municipality, November 2009.
Notes:
A Several small wind turbines are stand-alone DC-generating types. This data sheet covers merely AC-
generating turbines.
B The smallest turbines are often mounted on roofs, with almost no tower.
C Estimated total installed capacity of turbines below 1.5 kW: 21.98 MW in UK 2010. Estimated annual
generation: 19.26 GWh in 2010.
D Open agricultural land, good wind conditions; 10 metres above ground.
E Populated areas
F Information from manufacturers
G Cost data are the same as in the 2010 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2008 to 2011 by
multiplying by a factor 1.053

85
21 WIND TURBINES, OFFSHORE

More specific details on wind turbine technology are presented in technology sheet ‟20 Wind Turbines
On-shore‟.

Brief technology description


The typical concept is a tower with a three-bladed rotor mounted on a horizontal axis. The rotor drives
a gear and generator.

To minimize specific costs, offshore wind farms are typically based on large turbines in considerable
numbers.

For offshore applications the electricity is usually transformed to approx. 34 kV within each turbine.
The electricity from all the turbines (or a group hereof) is then collected and cabled to a transformer
station, which is either offshore or on-shore.

Input
Minimum wind speed: 3-4 m/s.
Rated power generation reached at around 12 m/s wind speed.
Maximum operational wind speed: Approx. 25- 30 m/s.

Output
Electricity.

Typical capacities
The physical limit of a single wind turbine is probably well above 20 MW (with current technologies).
Whether the economic optimum is reached before then is yet to be seen.

The main reason for increasing the capacity per turbine is to decrease foundation costs. However, there
may be no wind resource argument to increase the height above 150-200 metres (5-10 MW), since the
wind energy per m2 may actually decrease due to a boundary layer between the upper jet winds and the
lower winds.

The first offshore wind farms were established in the 1990‟s, with total capacities from 2 to 17 MW. A
new Danish offshore wind farm "Anholt" of 400 MW will be commissioned in 2012. The U.K.
established several offshore wind farms in 2011, ranging from 30 to 175 MW.

Regulation ability
See technology sheet ‟20 Wind turbines on-shore‟.

86
Advantages/disadvantages
The case for offshore wind power is that the wind conditions generally are much better offshore than
on-shore, and therefore the higher cost for offshore wind farms can be justified by a larger electricity
production per installed megawatt.

The wind speeds do not increase as much with the height above sea level as they do on land. This
implies that it may be economic to use lower (and thus cheaper) towers.

The wind is less turbulent at sea than over land, resulting in less mechanical fatigue.

See also ‟20 Wind turbines on-shore‟ for general advantages and disadvantages of wind turbines.

Environment
For offshore wind turbines some disturbance to sea-life must be anticipated during the construction
phase and the operation phase.

Before, during and after the construction of two Danish wind farms Horns Reef I (160 MW) and
Nysted (166 MW) comprehensive monitoring programmes were launched to investigate and document
the environmental impact of these two wind farms (ref. 5). The monitoring programmes showed that,
under the right conditions, even big wind farms pose low risks to birds, mammals and fish, even though
there will be changes in the living conditions of some species by an increase in habitat heterogeneity.
They also showed that it is possible to adapt offshore wind farms in a way which is environmentally
sustainable and which causes no significant damage to the marine environment.

Research and development


Besides the R&D potential described in technology element „20 Wind turbines on-shore‟, the following
challenges need be addressed:
Monitoring and maintenance strategies
New foundation concepts
Foundations for water depths beyond 15 meters
Impacts on ocean environment

Furthermore, novel technologies may be developed and tested. Some concepts have been described in
ref. 4:
Hybrid fossil fuel/wind energy facilities on offshore oil and gas platforms.
Hybrid wave/wind energy facilities
Floating wind turbines. The first full-scale floating wind turbine (2.3 MW) was commissioned
in the sea off Stavanger in Norway, September 2009 (ref. 3). It fell over during a hurricane
December 2011.

87
Additional remarks
Please refer to the discussion of the average annual plant capacity factor in technology element „20
Wind turbines on-shore‟.

Danish average utilization times (capacity factor multiplied by 8760 hours) for off-shore turbines 2004-
2008 (corrected to a normal wind year) are shown in the below table together with values for planned
sites (ref. 2 + 1):

Planned,
In operation availability 100%
North Sea
Horns Rev I 4110
Rønland 4120
Horns Rev II 4280
Ringkøbing 4300
Jammerbugt 4100
Inner seas, open sea
Nysted/Rødsand 3620
Samsø 3570
Djursland 4010
Store Middelgrund 4030
Kriegers Flak 4040
Rønne Banke 4060
Inner seas, near shore
Middelgrunden 2510
Frederikshavn 2640

Average investment cost structure for wind farms at Horns Reef I (160 MW; established 2002) and
Nysted (166 MW; established 2003), both Denmark (ref. 4; here converted to 2011 price level):

Investment (k€/MW) Share (%)


Turbines ex works, incl. transport and erection 912 49
Foundations 392 21
Internal grid between turbines 95 5
Transformer station and main cable to coast 302 16
Design, project management 112 6
Environmental analysis etc. 56 3
Miscellaneous 11 <1
Total 1881 100

88
There is a very clear relation between foundation costs and water depth, price level 2011 (ref. 1):

Water depth (metres) Foundation cost (M€/MW)


10 0.45
20 0.69
30 1.1
40 1.5 - 2.0

The investment cost of the transformer station depends much on, whether helicopter landing is required
or not. Helicopter service is required in the North Sea, while service by ship is sufficient in most inner
Danish seas. Typical investment costs in million EUR (2011) for a 200 MW wind farm are (ref. 1):

Water depth (metres)


10 30-40
Helicopter landing included 30 38
Helicopter landing excluded 24 32

The landfall costs (cable to shore plus connection to grid) depends primarily on the distance. For a 200
MW wind farm, using a 132/150 kV cable, the typical cost in million EUR (price level 2011) is (ref. 1):

Distance to shore (km) Investment cost (M€)


15 19
30 38
50 50

References
1. "Fremtidens havmølleplaceringer - 2025" ("Future locations for offshore wind parks"; in Danish),
Danish Energy Agency, April 2007.
2. Energinet.dk, 2009.
3. www.statoilhydro.com, 2009.
4. “Contribution to the Chapter on Wind Power, Energy Technology Perspectives 2008” (published
by the International Energy Agency), J. Lemming et al, Risø National Laboratory for Sustainable
Energy, Denmark, January 2008.
5. “The Danish offshore wind farm demonstration project: Horns Rev and Nysted offshore wind
farms. Review report 2005”, DONG Energy and Vattenfall, 2006.

89
Data sheet

The below data are based on a typical water depth (10 metres) and distance to shore (15 km) of wind
farms established 2009-2011. The cost of a helicopter landing platform on the transformer station is
excluded.

Technology Offshore windturbines


2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one 4-7 5 - 10 8 - 10 8 - 10 1+2
turbinediameter
Rotor (MW) (m) 110 - 140 130 - 160 160 - 170 160 - 200 1+2

Hub height (m) 85 95 115 130 1


Average annual plant capacity 0.457 0.479 0.502 0.514 A 1
factor
Availability (%) 96 97 97 98 1
Technical lifetime (years) 20 20 25 30 1
Construction time (years) 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 1+2
Financial data
Nominal investment, total costs 3.1 2.4 2.3 2.1 B+C 1+2;1
(M€/MW) ;1;1
Total O&M (€/MWh) 19 17 16 15 C 1

References:
1 "Vindmøllers økonomi" (Economy of wind turbines), final report prepared by the project
'Economy of wind turbines 2007-2009', with major Danish stakeholders as participants. P.
Nielsen, EMD International, et al, January 2010.
2 DONG Energy, December 2009.
Notes:
A The capacity factor is quite site- and technology-specific, cf. above 'Special remarks'.
B The average cost of 11 offshore wind parks installed 2001- 2009 was 2.1 M€/MW (1.4 – 2.7
M€/MW), whereas the average cost of 13 planned offshore wind parks (in operation 2010 –
2013) was 3.1 M€/MW (2.3 – 3.8 M€/MW). This significant price increase has several causes,
the most recognized ones being price increases in main resources, such as steel, and the
fact that the current market is very much demand-driven. Also, most developers of the
planned wind parks are situated on the very steep part of the learning curve. The forecasted
price development presented here anticipates that the current out-of-the-ordinary situation
will cease before 2020, and that the market thus will reach balance.

C Cost data are the same as in the 2010 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2008 to
2011 by multiplying by a factor 1.053

90
For scenarios including more ambitious developments, cost data may be increased according to the
tables in section „Additional remarks‟, or you may refer to the below summary matrix in million EUR
(2011) per MW:

Water depth (metres)


10 20 30 40
.
15 0 0.24 0.64 1.28
Distance to
shore (km)

30 0.09 0.34 0.74 1.38

50 0.15 0.40 0.80 1.44

Additional investment costs, relative to a location at 10


metres water, 15 km from the shore, and without
helicopter landing on the transformer station.

91
22 PHOTOVOLTAIC CELLS, GRID-CONNECTED SYSTEMS

Brief technology description


A photovoltaic cell (PV) generates electricity, when exposed to light such as solar radiation.

PV modules can be produced from many different materials:


1. Crystalline silicon: The individual cells are based on mono- or poly-crystalline silicon wafers.
Almost 90 % of PV systems in the world are made of crystalline silicon solar cells. This
technology is expected to remain the dominating PV technology until at least 2020 (ref. 6).
2. Thin film panels: The active photovoltaic material, which is amorphous silicon, cadmium-
telluride or copper-indium-selenide (CdTe, CIS or CIGS), is deposited directly on the cover or
bottom glass of the solar panel in a micro-meter thin layer. Both Tandem-Junction and Triple
Junction thin film modules, where several layers are deposited on top of each other in order to
increase the efficiency, are already today commercial available.
3. Organic solar cells and Dye-Sensitized solar Cells (DSC): Significant research activities are
currently devoted to development of cells made by organic materials or combinations of dyes and
liquid electrolytes. This kind of cells are expected to develop into commercial products in the
2020-2030 timeframe (ref. 1), but are not considered viable candidates for grid-connected
systems.

Other types of PV cells are found, such as special cells for concentrated sunlight or for conversion of
infrared radiation from a combustion process (thermo photovoltaic)

This technology sheet deals with grid-connected systems only. The major components of such a system
are PV modules, inverter, and mechanical and electrical assembly equipment.

Input
Solar radiation.

The seasonal variation of electricity generation from a typical PV system in Denmark is shown in the
below figure (ref. 3):

% of average

200

180

160

140

120

100 190
174
80 154 161
133 128
60
109

40
58
47
20
17 19
11
0
Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec
92
In Denmark, about half of the electricity generated originates from diffuse radiation. This implies a
fairly high degree of freedom in orienting the PV modules, both inclination and east-west (ref. 5).

Output
Direct current (DC) electricity. The DC electricity can be converted to alternating current (AC)
electricity by using an inverter.

The electrical output depends on:


Solar radiation
Installed capacity; typically stated in WP (p for peak power; i.e. the electrical generation
capacity at Standard Test Conditions (STC), i.e. at a light intensity of 1000 W/m2 and 25 oC cell
temperature).
Orientation of the PV panel; i.e. azimuth (angle relative to direction towards Equator) and tilt
(angle relative to horizontal). In Denmark the optimum orientation is azimuth 180o and tilt 42o.
Panel temperature (minor impact), soiling and/or shadows/shades
Efficiency and electrical characteristic of the inverter
Cable length and cross section, and overall quality of components

Typical capacities
PV systems are available from a few milliwatt to megawatt sizes.

Silicon solar cells are typically assembled into modules of 54-72 individual cells. The module voltage
is typically 25-40 volt DC; higher voltage can be obtained by connecting more modules in series or in
parallel. Most common in the market are PV modules with a capacity of 180-270 WP, but up to 440 Wp
is available.

The typical capacity for a solar roof-top system in Denmark is 4 –6 kW; equivalent to an area of 30 –
50 m2 for crystalline silicon. A PV system with a capacity of 1 kWp will typically produce 850-900
kWh per year.

Regulation ability
PV system reflects the daylight variations. To the extent the grid peak load follows the daylight, PV
systems can be – and often are, such as in California and southern Europe – used as peak shavers or as
grid support at the end of feeder lines.

State of art, PV inverters only have a positive impact on power quality, as their control function is of
high speed allowing them to improve local power quality. This is increasingly reflected in revised grid
codes for low voltage and medium voltage grid connection. However, high penetration of PV in grids
can lead to unwanted increase in voltage (ref. 9).

93
Advantages/disadvantages
Advantages:
PV uses no fuel for producing the electricity.
There is no air or other emissions from electricity generation.
Electricity is produced in the daytime, when demand is highest.
PV modules have a long lifetime, 30 years or more, and the modules are easily recycled.
PV systems are easy to install and operate; no moving parts.
PV systems integrated in buildings require no incremental ground space, and the electrical inter-
connection is readably available at no or little additional cost.

Disadvantages:
Grid-connected PV systems have high initial costs.
The output of a PV-system is directly proportional to the solar radiation, although the efficiency
decreases slightly by increasing temperature.
Relatively high area demand per kWh produced.

Environment
Under Danish climatic conditions, the energy payback time is 1 – 4 years (ref. 5).

The main ecological footprints from silicon cells stem from the energy consumed to produce the cells
(ref. 2).

The environmental impacts from silicon based PV modules are very limited, as they only contain small
amounts of harmful chemicals. Other PV modules containing very small amounts of cadmium and
arsenic may have environmental impact at demolition, if not carefully treated. Recycling of PV-
modules is well known, although the processes are still being developed and refined, and the typical
main components such as PV cells, glass and aluminium can safely be recycled.

Research and development


R&D is primarily conducted in countries, which have already implemented PV technologies in large
volumes, such as Japan, USA and Germany.
The priorities in Denmark are (ref. 4):
Silicon feedstock for high-efficiency cells
New PV cells like photo-electro-chemical, polymer cells and nano-structured cells
Inverters; increased technical lifetime, high efficiency and lower costs
System technology, incl. integration in the overall electricity system
Building integration of PV modules
Design and aesthetics

Examples of best available technology


The Chinese company Suntech Power Co. Ltd (www.suntech-power.com) is the largest manufacturer
of wafer based solar cells/modules in the world with 2010 shipments of more than 1,5 GW. The main
market for Suntech Power is Germany and Italy. Manufacturing cost of about 1 €/Wp has been reported
(ref. 7).

94
The American company First Solar (www.firstsolar.com) is the largest manufacturer of thin film solar
cells in the world. In 2010 the company signed contracts to establish several 200-500 MW power plants
in the USA. The company announced in 2011 that it had reduced its manufacturing cost to about 0.65
USD per watt.

Additional remarks
At present, PV modules account for roughly 60 % of total system costs, with mounting structures,
inverters, cabling, etc. accounting for the rest (ref. 1).

The nominal investment cost for larger systems are typically lower than for smaller systems. Prices for
systems installed in Europe 2010 were 2.7-5.9 €/W (average 4.1 €W) for systems below 10 kW and
2.4-5.4 €/W (average 3.4 €/W) for systems above 10 kW (ref. 6).

In Denmark in 2011 the PV Island Bornholm (PVIB) project installed about 350 PV roof-top systems
with an aggregate capacity of about 2.1 MW at an average turn-key price including VAT of almost
DKK 26/W or 3.5 €/W (ref. 8).

References
1. “Energy Technology Perspectives 2008”, International Energy Agency, 2008.
2. ”Life cycle assessment of Danish electricity and cogeneration”, Main report October 2000 and
update November 2003 (both in Danish), prepared by Danish electricity utilities. The update is
based on 2001 data.
3. Energinet.dk, 2006.
4. “Solceller. Dansk strategi for forskning, udvikling, demonstation og udbredelse” (Solar cells. A
Danish strategy for research, development, demonstration and deployment), Danish Energy
Agency, Energy Technology Development Programme (EUDP), and Energinet.dk, 2009.
5. “Notat om solcelleteknologi” (Memo on PV technology; in Danish); memo to the Danish Climate
Commission, PA Energy Ltd., 2009.
6. ”Trends in photovoltaic applications. Survey report of selected IEA countries between 1992 and
2010”, preliminary statistical data, IEA Photovoltaic Power Systems Programme (PVPS), 2011.
7. PV Status Report 2011, Institute of Energy, EC Joint Research Center, 2011.
8. Statistics from Oestkraft Holding A/S, analyzed by PA Energy in the PVIB Project.
9. Energinet.dk, 2011.

95
Data sheet:
Technology Photovoltaic cells, large grid-connected systems on
the ground
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Typical capacity for one unit (kW) 900 1300 1500 6
Module efficiency (%)
Crystalline silicon 14-20 20-28 8;1
Thin film 8-11 22-25 1
Third generation (PEC, polymer cells) 10-40 A 1
Inverter efficiency (%) 97 98 98 2;3;3
System efficiency (%) 90% of module efficiency 3
Net electricity generation (in Denmark)
per installed kW (kWh/kW) 800 B 4
Availability (%)
Technical lifetime (years) 30 30 30 10-50 C 5;5;5;1
Inverter lifetime 10 2
Financial data
Specific investment, total system (M€/MW) 1.5-2.5 1.3 1.1 0.9 D 10+11;3;
3;9
Total O&M (€/MWh) 34 19 13 E 6+9;6;6

References:
1 “Energy technology perspectives 2008”, International Energy Agency, 2008.
2 European Commission's Energy Technology Indicators
3 Danish Energy Agency, 2011
4 ”Renewable Energy RD&D Priorities. Insights from IEA Technology Programmes”, IEA, 2006
5 International Energy Agency (IEA): “Renewable Energy Costs and Benefits for Society (RECaBS)”, an
interactive website (http://recabs.iea-retd.org), 2007.
6 "A strategic research agenda for PV technology", the EU PV Technology Platform, quoted by “Notat om
solcelleteknologi” (Memo on PV technology; in Danish); memo to the Danish Climate Commission, PA
Energy Ltd., 2009.
7 "Renewable Energy RD&D Priorities. Insights from IEA Technology Programmes", IEA, 2006
8 PA Energy Ltd., October 2009.
9 “Energy technology perspectives 2010”, International Energy Agency, 2010.
10 "Projected costs of Generating Electricity, 2010", International Energy Agency & Nuclear Energy Agency,
2010.
11 "Large scale PV plants - Also in Denmark", PA Energy and SiCon, report to the Energy Research and
Demonstration Programme (EUDP) of the Danish Energy Agency, April 2011.
12 Addendum to ref. 11, January 2012.
Notes:
A Third generation cells may include two very different conepts, ultra-high efficiency and ultra-low cost. This
implies a large span in efficiencies.
B Germany 1000 kWh/kW; Italy, Spain and Portugal 1400 kWh/kW (ref. 7).
C First generation cells have very long lives (40-50 years), while younger generations have shorter lives, with
ultra-low cost 3. generation cells around 10-15 years.
D Ref. 10 quotes prices of 2.2-5.0 M€/MW for plants expected to be commissioned in 2015. Ref. 12 quotes
prices of 1.35-2.10 M€/MW for ground placed turnkey installations above 200 kW, based on 5 actual
tenders. The very low prices end 2011 (ref. 12) was partly due to a substantial excess production capacity
compared with market demand. On this background, the data from these two sources have here been
aggregated to 1.5-2.5 M€/MW. The inverter typically constitutes about 15% of total investment cost.
E The O&M costs are primarily due to reinvestments or repair of inverters, secondarily to periodic overhauls.

96
23 WAVE ENERGY

Brief technology description


A wave power converter comprises a structure interacting with the incoming waves. The wave power is
converted by a Power Take-off (PTO) system based on hydraulic, mechanical or pneumatic principles
driving a rotating electrical generator producing electricity or by a linear generator directly driven by
the structure.

Numerous concepts are under development. Most of them can be classified according to three
categories (ref. 2):
A. A point absorber is a floating device, moved up and down by the waves, typically anchored to
the sea floor.
B. A terminator is a structure located perpendicular to the wave movement, „swallowing‟ the
waves
C. An attenuator is placed in the wave direction, activated by the passing waves.

There is no commercially leading technology on wave power conversion at the present time. However
a few different systems are presently at a stage of being developed at sea for prototype testing or
developed at a more fundamental level including tank testing, design studies and optimisation.

Input
Energy in ocean waves.

The energy content along Europe‟s Atlantic coasts is typically 40-70 kW/m. The wave influx in the
Danish part of the North Sea is 24 kW/m farthest West, 7 kW/m nearer the coast, in average about 15
kW/m. The inner seas are irrelevant with only 1 kW/m (ref. 2).

The annual variation is normally within +/- 25%, while the seasonal variation is around 5:1, with
highest potential during winter (ref. 2).

Output
Electricity.
Some systems are designed to pump water and produce potable water.

Typical capacities
The electrical output from wave power converters in some cases are generated by electrical connected
groups of smaller generator units of 100 – 500 kW, in other cases several mechanical or hydraulically
interconnected modules supply a single larger turbine-generator unit of 1 – 3 MW. These sizes are for
pilot and demonstration projects. Commercial wave power plants will comprise a large number of
devices, as is the case with offshore wind farms.

97
Regulation ability
The ability to regulate the system operation depends on the design of the PTO system. In general the
systems are developed with the aim of regulating the system to absorb most of the incoming waves at a
given time, but also to enable disconnection of the system from the grid if required for safety or other
reasons.

Wave power is more predictable compared to wind power and the waves will continue some time after
the wind has stopped blowing. This could help increase the value of systems with combined wind and
wave power.

Advantages/disadvantages
Advantages:
Wave power converters produce power without the use of fossil fuels.
The power plants are located in the ocean without much visual intrusion.
Wave power is a more predictable resource compared to wind.
Extracting energy from waves can help costal protection, as the wave heights are reduced

Disadvantages:
The initial prototype development at sea is costly and the successful development to reach costs
comparable with i.e. off shore wind will require dedicated development programmes and
substituted electricity prices until the technology has matured.
In Denmark, the largest wave energy resource is found 150 km from the shore, making grid
connection only feasible for large wave energy farms.
Wave power converters, albeit at sea, take up large amounts of space, much dependent on type
of converter and how much power is extracted. It is too early to tell, whether wave power will
require more or less space than offshore wind power (ref. 7).

Environmental aspects
As for wind-energy a positive life cycle impact is expected. Planned in cooperation with navigation, oil
exploitation, wind farms and fishing industry wave power plants are expected to have a positive impact
on the living conditions for fish in the sea, by providing sheltered areas.

Research and development


The most recent Danish R&D strategy (ref. 3) has three focus areas:
Continue the development and demonstration of concepts that have already proven a technical
and economical potential.
Support R&D in new concepts with promising perspectives.
Evaluate most feasible sites, assess ways of safe anchoring, and determine how wave energy is
best integrated into the Danish electricity system.

Examples of best available technology


It is too early to define best available technologies, since numerous technologies are being tested and
demonstrated. Recent reviews have identified about 100 projects at various stages of development, and
the number does not seem to be decreasing. Most concepts are described in ref. 5. This includes the

98
most mature Danish technologies: Wave Star, Wave Dragon, Poseidon Floating Power Plant,
Waveplane, Dexa.

By 2009, several plants with an individual turbine/generator capacity of up to 0.7 MW have been
demonstrated (ref. 6).

Scotland and Portugal are very active in developing wave energy. Portugal had a goal of having 23
MW capacity installed by end of 2009. The first plant consisted of 3 Pelamis wave devices
(www.pelamiswave.com), each 750 kW, installed in 2008 (ref. 1 and 2). However, due to financial
problems for one of the investors, the plant was not in continuous operation end of 2009 (ref. 4).

National targets in Europe (ref. 9):


United Kingdom: 0.3 GW in 2020
Ireland: 0.5 GW in 2020
France: 0.3 GW in 2015
Spain: 0.2 GW in 2015
Portugal: 0.3 GW in 2020

Additional remarks
A cost breakdown of a typical mature ocean energy project is as follows (ref. 1):

Site preparation: 12%


Civil works: 55%
Mechanical and electrical equipment: 21%
Electrical transmission: 5%
Contingencies: 7%

Such a breakdown depends much on the chosen system and ocean location i.e. water depth and distance
to shore. Energinet.dk has developed a spreadsheet to estimate the cost of energy (ref. 8).

References
1 “Energy Technology Perspectives 2008”, International Energy Agency, 2008.
2. “Ressourceopgørelse for bølgekraft i Danmark” (Wave energy resources in Denmark), Aalborg
University for the Danish Commission on Climate Change Policy, May 2009.
3. “Bølgekraftteknologi. Strategi for forskning og udvikling” (Wave power technologies. Strategy
for R&D; in Danish); Danish Energy Agency and Energinet.dk, June 2005.
4. Aalborg University, Department of Civil Engineering, November 2009.
5. International Energy Agency Implementing Agreement on Ocean Energy Systems (IEA-OES;
www.iea-oceans.org), Annual Report 2008.
6. “State of the art analysis”, status report of the Waveplam project, February 2009.
www.waveplam.eu/files/downloads/SoA.pdf
7. DONG Energy, December 2009.
8. www.energinet.dk/DA/KLIMA-OG-MILJOE/Energi-og-klima/Forskning-i-vedvarende-
energi/Sider/Boelgekraft.aspx

99
9. www.eu-
oea.com/euoea/files/ccLibraryFiles/Filename/000000001047/Cover%20letter%20position%20pa
per_merged.pdf

Data sheet

Wave Power
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one power plant (MW) 1.0 - 30 2.0 - 50 10 - 100 50 - 500 1;1;4;4
Length of installation of one power plant km 0.2 - 2 0.2 - 5.0 1 - 20 5 - 100 1;1;4;4
Annual generated electricity production (MWh/MW) 1500 2500 3500 4500 4

Availlability (%) 90 95 97 98 4
Technical lifetime (years) 10 20 25 30 4
Construction time 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 C 4
Financial data
Nominal investment (M€/MW) 4.6-11 3.8-9.0 2.2-4.5 1,6 A+B 2;2;2;3
O&M (€/MWh) 20 15 10 7 4
O&M (€/kW/year) 85 47 3

References:
1 Wave Net final report, Project no. ERK5 – CT –1999-20001 (2000 - 2003)
“Energy Technology Perspectives 2008”, International Energy Agency,
2 2008.
“Energy Technology Perspectives 2010”, International Energy Agency,
3 2010.
4 Danish Wave Energy Association, 2012
Notes:
A The cost presented provides an estimate for what capital cost and operating costs of wave power converters might be
in the future assuming all R&D challenges have been overcome, that economics of scale have been realized and that
efficiencies in production and operation due to the learning curve effect have been achieved.
B Cost data are the same as in the 2010 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2008 to 2011 by multiplying with a
general inflation factor 1.053
C Much dependent on plant size and location.

100
30 SOLID OXIDE FUEL CELLS

Brief technology description


The solid oxide fuel cell (SOFC) is an electrochemical cell that converts hydrogen and oxygen into
electricity, heat and water. When the heat is recuperated, the fuel cell work in a Combined Heat and
Power (CHP) mode, otherwise it is a Power generator only.

The Solid Oxide Fuel Cell (SOFC) is a high-temperature fuel cell (600-800 C) and the exhaust gas can
be used to drive gas or steam turbines in combined cycle mode. Electricity efficiency of a single cycle
SOFC-plant in the range 1-200 kW can be approximately 60%1, when fuelled with natural gas at
atmospheric pressure. The systems may achieve overall efficiencies up to 88 % (ref. 5) or beyond, if
low temperature heat can be utilized. Some vendors expect electrical efficiencies of 70-75 %, when
combining with gas turbines.

SOFCs are particularly appropriate for stationary applications. Here, large fuel cell generators are
described. Differentiation is made between CHP for continuous power delivery, which requires long
life time, and plants for providing balancing power in shorter periods, requiring shorter lifetime.

Input
Natural gas, methane, methanol, hydrogen and similar fuels can be used. Hydrogen may originate from
electrolysis (e.g. based on renewable electricity) or waste from the chemical industry.

Units fuelled by methane gas will include a reformer. Hydrogen units will need an electrolyser and
hydrogen storage for local production.

Output
Electricity (DC) and heat.
If AC is needed, a DC/AC inverter is required.

Typical capacities
The typical capacities can range from 10 kW to multi megawatt of electricity and from 10 kW to
megawatt of heat.

Regulation ability
It is expected, that SOFC fuel cells will have good part load capabilities between 100 - 20 % load.

To guarantee optimal running high temperature fuel cells need to be kept at working temperature,
requiring sufficient insulation or additional energy during the idle running phases.

1
ESTO report expects 45-47% electrical efficiency and 80-85% overall efficiency of a similar system (ref. 2). Also other
sources of information predicts electricity efficiencies around 50 % or higher for natural gas fuelled SOFC-systems (ref. 4,
5)

101
Advantages/disadvantages
One advantage is high electrical efficiency also at reduced load. This can be beneficial for a liberalised
and volatile energy market, since the need for regulation of decentralised power plants may increase.
Furthermore, the total waste heat is made available in a flexible way at high temperatures. This means
that the waste heat can be utilised in combined cycle plants, not just for district heating.

A disadvantage is the long start up time needed to heat up the fuel cell from cold-state (4-6 hours).

Environment
Due to higher efficiencies, absence of open flame as well as other features, fuel cells are less polluting
per kWh electricity than conventional and other competing CHP technologies. There is no emission of
sulphur containing compounds and soot. NOx levels are also very modest.

If a fossil fuel is used as fuel for a SOFC system, CO2 will be emitted, albeit less than for alternative
technologies.

Research and development


The fuel cell technology has proven higher electrical efficiency than competing power generating
technologies. However, the fuel cell technology still has to mature with regards to issues such as life
time and cost reduction. It is expected that the Danish fuel cell technology matures to reach a
commercial level within this decade.

In Denmark a document has defined the Overall Strategy for Development of Fuel Cell Technology
(ref. 4). Among other conclusions it states that fuel cell systems have potential interest for society
based on environmental-, economical-, energy-, and system considerations. However, a considerable
R&D effort is needed primarily to reduce costs of fuel cells, stacks, and systems, and to ensure high
efficiency and long durability.

There is focus on development of cells and cell-stacks for different purposes. Currently work is
progressing on two types of SOFCs:
Anode supported cells optimized for operation at 700-800 C (2nd generation)
Metal-supported cells optimized for operation at approximately 600 C (3rd generation)

Examples of best available technology


At H.C. Ørsted power plant a 10 kW SOFC demonstration has been deployed during 2009 operating at
natural gas. The stack technology was delivered by Topsoe Fuel Cell and the manufacture of the unit
was made by EBZ GmbH.

Bloom Energy (USA) has delivered several 100 kW Bloom Box power plants in the US based on
SOFC technology.

Additional remarks
As SOFC is a new technology which is not yet fully developed it is difficult to get reliable estimates for
the future.

102
References
1: Siemens AG; www.energy.siemens.com/hq/en/power-generation/fuel-cells/; 2009.
2: Fuel Cells – Impact and consequences of fuel cells technology on sustainable development. t.
Fleischer and D. Oertel. An ESTO Project Report prepared for Prospective Technology Studies
Joint Research Centre by Institut für Technikfolgenabschätzung und Systemanalyse (ITAS),
March 2003.
3: Topsoe Fuel Cell, October 2009.
4: ”Overordnet strategi for udvikling af brændselscelle teknologi i Danmark” (Overall Strategy for
Development of Fuel Cell Technology, in Danish). Eltra, Elkraft System, and Danish Energy
Agency, 2003.
5: Solid Oxide Fuel Cells - Assessment of Technology from an Industrial Perspective. Pålsson et. al.
Haldor Topsøe A/S Lyngby, Denmark, May 2003.

103
Data sheets

Technology Solid Oxide Fuel Cell (SOFC)


Continuous power generation, fuelled by natural gas
at atmospheric pressure
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit (MW) 0.1 1 10 100 1
Total efficiency (%) net 90 92 95 97 A 1
Electricity efficiency (%) net, full load 50 55 60 63
A 1
25% load 45 50 52 55
Working temperature (oC) 750 750 650 650 1
Technical lifetime, power (years) 6 15 20 20 1
Environment (fuel: natural gas)
SO2 (mg per kWh) 0 0 0 0 1+2
NOX (kg per GJ fuel) 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 B 1+2
CH4 (mg per kWh) negligible negligible negligible negligible 1+2
CO (kg per GJ fuel) < 0.003 < 0.003 < 0.003 < 0.003 B 1+2
NMVOC (mg per kWh) negligible negligible negligible negligible 1+2
Financial data
Investment (M€/MWel) 5.0 1.5 0.8 0.5 C 1
Total O&M (€/MWh) 25 10 4 3 D 1

References:
1 Danish Power Systems, Dantherm Power, H2logic Aps., IRD A/S, Serenergy A/S. & Topsoe Fuel Cell
A/S, 2011.
2 Fuel Cells – Impact and consequences of fuel cells technology on sustainable development. T.
Fleischer and D. Oertel. An ESTO Project Report prepared for Prospective Technology Studies Joint
Research Centre by Institut für Technikfolgenabschätzung und Systemanalyse (ITAS). March 2003”.
Notes:
A Based on lower heating value.
B Hydrogen produced by electrolysis and fuel cells operated on pure hydrogen have none of the listed
emissions.
C Including fuel processing e.g. methane reformer or electrolyser, but no building included.
D Service and maintenance e.g. change of filters, fuel cell stacks.

104
Technology Solid Oxide Fuel Cell (SOFC)
Balancing plant, fuelled by natural gas at atmospheric
pressure
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit (MW) 0.1 0.5 0.5 A 1
Total efficiency (%) net 90 92 92 B+C 1
Electricity efficiency (%) net > 52.5 > 55 > 55 B+C 1
Working temperature (oC) 750 650 650 B+C 1
Maximum time for cold start-up (hours) 6 4 4 1
Start-up time, when warm (seconds) 90 90 90 D
Technical lifetime, power (years) 3 5 5 1
Construction time (years) 1 1 1 3
Environment (fuel: natural gas)
SO2 (mg per kWh) 0 0 0 1
NOX (kg per GJ fuel) 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 E 1
CH4 (mg per kWh) negligible negligible negligible 1
CO (kg per GJ fuel) < 0.003 < 0.003 < 0.003 E 1
NMVOC (mg per kWh) negligible negligible negligible 1
Financial data
Investment (M€/MWel) 2.0 0.4 0.4 C+F 1
Total O&M (€/MWh) 25 10 10 G 1

References:
1 Danish Power Systems, Dantherm Power, H2logic Aps., IRD A/S, Serenergy A/S. & Topsoe Fuel Cell A/S,
2011.
2 Siemens AG; www.energy.siemens.com/hq/en/power-generation/fuel-cells/; 2009.
3 Danish Gas Technology Centre, 2011
Notes:
A Scalable units stated is minimum output.
B Based on lower heating value.
C Electrolyser and hydrogen storage not included.
D From 20% load to 100% load.
E The listed emissions are related to reformed methane fuelled units, hydrogen fuelled units does not have
any emissions
F Depends on economics of scale – includes DC/AC grid connection and heat grid connection
G Service and maintenance e.g. change of filters, fuel cell stacks

105
31 PROTON EXCHANGE MEMBRANE FUEL CELLS

Brief technology description


In a Proton Exchange – or Polymer Electrolyte - Membrane Fuel Cell (PEM FC) an electrochemical
conversion of hydrogen into electricity and heat takes place. It is a relatively low temperature fuel cell,
which can change load very fast. It consists of a thin polymer membrane, which allows penetration of
hydrogen ions.

PEM FC is the fuel cell technology, which is most developed so far, and it is currently available on the
market up to 250 kW.

In Denmark, the following main types are being developed:


Low temperature (LT PEM), conventional water cooled; by University of South Denmark, IRD
Fuel Cells and Dantherm Power.
Medium temperature (MT PEM); by IRD Fuel Cells.
High temperature (HT PEM); by Danish Power Systems (DPS), Technical University of
Denmark, IRD Fuel Cells, Dantherm Power and Serenergy.
Direct methanol fuel cells (DMFC); by IRD Fuel Cells, University of Southern Denmark and
Technical University of Denmark.

LT PEMs operate from subzero up to 80 C and are sensitive to carbon monoxide in the fuel gas. A
variant of the LT PEM can operate directly on diluted methanol. MT PEMs operate from subzero to
around 120ºC and are less sensitive to fuel impurities than LT PEM. HT PEMs operates from 120ºC
up till 200 C, and can work with several percentages of carbon monoxide in the fuel gas. PEM FCs
working at 150-200 C can be run with hydrogen from the reformer/shift unit (reforms natural gas or
liquid fuels to hydrogen), which is not purified. Efficiency of the HT PEMs is not yet on the level of
the best LT PEMs, but the potential is there (ref. 1).

In this section, large fuel cell generators are described. Differentiation is made between CHP for
continuous power delivery, which requires long life time, and plants for providing balancing power in
shorter periods, requiring shorter lifetime.

Input
Hydrogen for LT/MT/HT PEM, methanol for DMFC.
If another hydrogen carrying agent such as methane is used, it needs to be reformed into hydrogen in an
external reformer. This is where HT PEM offers more simple system architecture.

Output
Electricity (DC) and heat.
If AC is needed, a DC/AC inverter is required.

106
Typical capacities
The typical capacities can range from 1 to 200 kW (ref. 1).

Regulation ability
The LT PEM has a very short start-up time and PEM FC in general enables fast regulation of load due
to the relatively low operating temperature. However, if a reformer is part of the system, the regulation
is slower.

Environment
Primarily due to the higher efficiencies and lower temperatures than normal combustion, fuel cells are
expected to be less polluting per kWh than conventional technologies (except for NMVOC – non-
methane volatile organic compounds). Also, fuel cell systems might be developed as CHP-plants in
small scale (micro - for individual homes) with relatively high efficiencies. That may enlarge the
market and application of micro scale CHP and thus increase the overall efficiency of the electricity
and heat systems.

However, if a fossil fuel is reformed to hydrogen, the emissions from reforming must be taken into
account. Emissions of CO2 will per energy unit of fossil fuel be the same from fuel cells as that of a
conventional technology, but if storage of CO2 will be an option, extraction of CO2 from a fuel cell
system is expected to be advantageous compared to conventional technology. It implies that a
comprehensive infrastructure system is constructed to handle the CO2. A substantial CO2 saving is
achieved in most applications due to the high efficiencies.

Advantages/disadvantages
PEM FC can be used for mobile applications (battery chargers for remote power supply in leisure,
military and marine) as well as stationary applications (power back up for Telecom, combined heat and
power supply for housing applications, balancing the grid etc.). Several large car companies all over the
world are undertaking research to develop the technology (ref. 2).

LT PEM only operates on very clean hydrogen; the content of CO must be below 50-100 ppm (ref. 1).
HT PEM is more tolerant and can accept 1% CO or more (ref. 6).

Research and development


In Denmark an Overall Strategy for Development of Fuel Cell Technology was recently issued by the
stakeholders of “The Danish Partnership for hydrogen and Fuel Cells” (ref. 3). Among other
conclusions it states that fuel cell systems have potential of interest for society on the grounds of
environmental-, economical-, energy-, and system considerations. However, a considerable R&D effort
is needed primarily to reduce costs of fuel cells, stacks, and systems, and to ensure high efficiency and
long durability.

In the Sevens Framework Programme of EU fuel cells are included in the Research activities having an
impact in the medium and the longer term. A Joint Technological Initiative (JTI) for Fuel Cells and
Hydrogen Joint Undertaking (FCH JU) has been established in 2008. The FCH-JU is a unique public
private partnership supporting research, technological development and demonstration (RTD) activities
in fuel cell and hydrogen energy technologies in Europe. Its aim is to accelerate the market introduction

107
of these technologies, realizing their potential as an instrument in achieving a carbon-clean energy
system. The European Commission will contribute with up to 470 M€ for the 6-year period until 2013
(ref. 4).

Examples of best available technology


A 10 kW hydrogen-fuelled power plant was demonstrated by Norwegian Hydro at the island Utsira
(Norway) in the period 2004-2007. The generator was delivered by IRD A/S and based on their LT
PEM technology.

H2 Logic in 2010 installed a complete hydrogen production and fuel cell combined heat and power
plant for storage of renewable energy in Greenland. The plant has a production capacity of 19 Nm3
H2/hour and a fuel cell power on 20 kW (ref. 7).

Dantherm Power has in 2009 delivered a 100 kW unit to BC Hydro in Canada operating on hydrogen
made from electrolysis on a remote location in British Colombia. The installation produces hydrogen at
night and electricity during day time in order to match supply for a hydropower plant and demand from
a small community. In 2011 Dantherm Power has shipped 5 hydrogen fuelled system of 45 to 50 kW to
South Africa and Korea,

Ballard (Canada) is delivering a 1 MW unit to Toyota Motor Sales in California, USA. Hydrogen is
produced by steam-reformation of renewable bio-gas generated from landfill gas. The unit will be in
operation in 2012. Earlier Ballard in 2010 commissioned a similar system at First Energy Corp. in Ohio
USA for grid balancing. Ballard has delivered a number of smaller systems ranging from 163 kW an up
in size.

Nedstack (Netherlands) have in 2011 constructed a 1 MW PEM fuel cell generator to be operated on
waste hydrogen from Solvays chlor-alkali plant in Lillo, near Antwerp, Belgium (ref. 8).

Additional remarks
As fuel cells are a new technology, which is not yet fully developed, it is difficult to get reliable
estimates for the future. Furthermore the technology is not being sold on the open market and prices are
not readily available.

There is no international norm on how to define the efficiency of a fuel cell. This should be taken into
account when comparing efficiencies from different references.

References
1. IRD A/S, November 2009.
2. Fuel Cells – Impact and consequences of fuel cells technology on sustainable development. t.
Fleischer and D. Oertel. An ESTO Project Report prepared for Prospective Technology Studies
Joint Research Centre by Institut für Technikfolgenabschätzung und Systemanalyse (ITAS).
March 2003
3. www.hydrogennet.dk/new/home.asp
4. http://europa.eu/rapid/pressReleasesAction.do?reference=MEMO/07/404
5. Dantherm Power, 2009.

108
6. Q. Li, R. He, J. Gao, J. O. Jensen and N. J. Bjerrum: “The CO poisoning effect in polymer
electrolyte membrane fuel cells operational at temperatures up to 200°C”. J. Electrochem. Soc.
150 (12), A1599-A1605 (2003)
7. www.h2logic.com/com/news/H2KT_info-sheet-ENG.pdf
8. www.nedstack.com/applications/demonstration-systems

Data sheets

Technology Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cell (PEMFC)


Continuous power generation, fuelled by natural gas
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit (MW) 0.1 1 10 100 1
Total efficiency (%) net 90 92 95 97 A 1
Electricity efficiency (%) net, full load 50 55 60 63
A 1
25% load 45 50 52 55
Working temperature (oC) 70 80 80 - 100 100 - 180 1
Technical lifetime, power (years) 6 15 20 20 1
Environment (fuel: natural gas)
SO2 (mg per kWh) 0 0 0 0 1+2
NOX (kg per GJ fuel) 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 B 1+2
CH4 (mg per kWh) negligible negligible negligible negligible 1+2
CO (kg per GJ fuel) < 0.003 < 0.003 < 0.003 < 0.003 B 1+2
NMVOC (mg per kWh) negligible negligible negligible negligible 1+2
Financial data
Investment (M€/MWel) 5.0 1.5 0.8 0.5 C 1
Total O&M (€/MWh) 25 10 4 3 D 1

References:
1 Danish Power Systems, Dantherm Power, H2logic Aps., IRD A/S, Serenergy A/S. & Topsoe Fuel Cell
A/S, 2011.
2 Fuel Cells – Impact and consequences of fuel cells technology on sustainable development. T.
Fleischer and D. Oertel. An ESTO Project Report prepared for Prospective Technology Studies Joint
Research Centre by Institut für Technikfolgenabschätzung und Systemanalyse (ITAS). March 2003”.
Notes:
A Based on lower heating value.
B Hydrogen produced by electrolysis and fuel cells operated on pure hydrogen have none of the listed
emissions.
C Including fuel processing e.g. methane reformer or electrolyser, but no building included.
D Service and maintenance e.g. change of filters, fuel cell stacks.

109
Technology Proton Exchange Membrane Fuel Cell (PEMFC)
Balancing plant, fuelled by natural gas
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit (MW) 0.1 0.5 0.5 A 1
Total efficiency (%) net 85 92 92 B+C 1
Electricity efficiency (%) net > 50 > 55 > 55 B+C 1
Working temperature (oC) 70 80 80 B+C 1
Start-up time, when warm (seconds) 60 60 60 D 1
Technical lifetime, power (years) 3 5 5 1
Construction time (years) 1 1 1 3
Environment (fuel: natural gas)
SO2 (mg per kWh) 0 0 0 1
NOX (kg per GJ fuel) 0.0001 0.0001 0.0001 E 1
CH4 (mg per kWh) negligible negligible negligible 1
CO (kg per GJ fuel) < 0.003 < 0.003 < 0.003 E 1
NMVOC (mg per kWh) negligible negligible negligible 1
Financial data
Investment (M€/MWel) 2.0 0.4 0.4 C+F 1
Total O&M (€/MWh) 25 10 10 G 1

References:
1 Danish Power Systems, Dantherm Power, H2logic Aps., IRD A/S, Serenergy A/S. & Topsoe Fuel Cell A/S,
2011.
2 Siemens AG; www.energy.siemens.com/hq/en/power-generation/fuel-cells/; 2009.
3 Danish Gas Technology Centre, 2011
Notes:
A Scalable units stated is minimum output.
B Based on lower heating value.
C Electrolyser and hydrogen storage not included.
D From 20% load to 100% load.
E The listed emissions are related to reformed methane fuelled units, hydrogen fuelled units does not have
any emissions
F Depends on economics of scale – includes DC/AC grid connection and heat grid connection
G Service and maintenance e.g. change of filters, fuel cell stacks

110
40 HEAT PUMPS

Brief description
Heat pumps employ the same technology as refrigerators, moving heat from a low-temperature location
to a warmer location. Heat pumps usually draw heat from the ambient (input heat) and convert the heat
to a higher temperature (output heat) through a closed process; either compressor heat pumps (using
electricity) or absorption heat pumps (using heat; e.g. steam, hot water or flue gas).

Heat pumps serve different purposes, e.g. industrial purposes, individual space heating, heat recovery
and district heat production. Today all small heat pump systems used for individual space heating are
driven by electricity.

For mechanically driven heat pumps, the heat output will be 2 to 5 times (the coefficient of
performance) the drive energy. The energy flow is illustrated in the Sankey diagram in figure 1 below:

Figure 1: The electrical power consumption of 25 kW enables the heat pump to


utilize 75 kJ/s from a low temperature heat source at 10° C. Thus delivering 100 kJ/s
at 50° C.

It is not possible to make general formulas for calculating the coefficient of performance (COP) since
the efficiency of the systems can vary significantly depending on the compressor type etc. The
theoretical COP is given by the temperature of the input and output heat:

both temperatures given in Kelvin (K = °C + 273.15)

For example, with a hot temperature of 80°C and a cold temperature of 10°C the theoretical COP is 5.0.
In all practical appliances the COP will be lower because of losses in the system, typically around 50-

111
65% (this is called the Carnot efficiency) of the theoretical COP. This rule-of-thumb is only valid with
small temperature differences on both sides (evaporator and condenser) and if the heat pump is used
within the optimum operating range of components and refrigerant.

For typical district heating applications, the COP is as shown in the Table 1 (ref. 1):

Table 1: Typical COP for district heating applications. The values regarding NH3
are only valid for multistage systems. Single stage NH3 heat pumps will have
considerable lower COP values in the temperature 112ranges displayed.
In absorption heat pumps, heat at a high temperature level is used as drive energy to regenerate the
refrigerant, so that it can evaporate at a low temperature level and utilize low grade energy. Energy
from both drive heat and the low temperature heat source is delivered at a temperature in between.
Theoretically 1 kJ of heat can regenerate 1 kJ of refrigerant meaning that an absorption heat pump has a
theoretical COP of 2. Due to losses inside the system the practical COP is around 1.7. For absorption
heat pumps the COP is not affected by temperature levels in the same way as mechanically driven heat
pumps. Certain temperature differences is required to have the process going, but as long as these are
met the COP will be around 1.7 and not affected by e.g. a further temperature increase of the drive
energy. The energy flow is illustrated in the Sankey diagram in figure 2:

Figure 2: The high temperature drive energy of 100 kJ/s enables the heat pump to
utilize 70 kJ/s from a low temperature heat source at 10° C. Thus delivering 170 kJ/s at
50° C.

Two-stage versions are available for particular high driving temperatures. In two-stage absorption heat
pumps, the drive energy is used twice enabling the heat pump to utilize almost twice as much low-
grade energy. The COP of two-stage systems is typically 2.3.

Input
A heat source (e.g. ambient air, water or ground, or waste-heat from an industrial process) and energy
to drive the process. Typical Danish temperatures are 0-18 °C as ground temperature and 5-10 °C as
groundwater temperature. Compressor heat pumps are driven by electricity or engines, whereas
absorption heat pumps are driven by heat; e.g. steam, hot water or flue gas, but also consume a small
amount of electricity.

In Denmark the heat source is primarily renewable energy, i.e. accumulated solar heat in top soil layers,
in ambient air, in lakes, streams or sea water. Also waste heat from industrial processes can be utilized
as heat source, as well as heat in waste water.

Output
Heat.

113
Absorption heat pumps can in principle deliver temperatures up to 94 oC, but to avoid instability the
temperature should not exceed 85-87 oC (ref. 4).

Typical capacities
The capacity of small heat pumps is 0.5 to 25 kJ/s heat output. Large heat pumps are available from 25
kJ/s to 3-5 MJ/s heat output. Larger heat pumps than 3-5 MJ/s will typically be a number of heat pump
units in parallel.

Regulation ability
The use of heat pumps can be beneficial for the overall electricity system in converting electricity to
heat at high efficiencies in times of surplus electricity generation. This feature becomes increasingly
valid, when more intermittent renewable energy generators are present in the power system.

Large heat pumps are usually regulated continuously. In starting from cold, electricity consumption is
full load fast, typically in less than 5 minutes.

Research and development


The phasing out of the ozone depleting refrigerants CFC and HCFC from the heat pump market has
been agreed internationally. The heat pump industry has introduced refrigerants, which are not ozone
depleting. It is primarily the so called HFC refrigerants that have been developed to replace the CFC
and HCFC refrigerants, but the HFC‟s contribute to global warming and therefore work has been
initiated in order to make sure that these also are phased out. From 2007 it has not been allowed to use
more than 10 kg of synthetic refrigerant in cooling or heat pump installations in Denmark. Therefore,
natural refrigerants must be used in larger heat pump installations. These are among others
hydrocarbons (propane, butane and iso-butane), carbon dioxide, ammonia, and water. The use of these
refrigerants does not decrease the energy efficiency, on the contrary if anything.

At the moment the most interesting technologies are CO2, ammonia, water vapour and hybrid systems
(H2O/NH3). No single refrigerant is valid for all applications and each of the technologies is “best
choice” in certain applications.

CO2 heat pumps operate in the so-called trans-critical pressure range, meaning that the refrigerant has a
temperature glide on the warm side while the cold side evaporate at a constant temperature. This means
that CO2 is particular suited in applications where heat is drawn from a low temperature source by
cooling it only a few degrees, while the delivered heat is provided at a temperature glide of maybe 40°
C. Such an application could be recovering heat from a water treatment plant by cooling the water from
10 – 5° C, while delivering the heat to a district heating system by heating the water from 40 – 80° C.
The maximum temperature of CO2 systems is app. 90° C. In order to obtain good COP values in CO2
systems the inlet temperature of the heated media should not be higher than app. 40° C.

Ammonia as a refrigerant condenses and evaporates at constant temperatures, meaning that heat is both
withdrawn and provided at almost constant temperature. Because of this, a one-stage ammonia heat
pump is not very well suited for large temperature glides on either cold or warm side. If the application
requires a high temperature lift ammonia heat pumps should be done in two or more stages. Hereby

114
each stage will lift the temperature a number of degrees in series exploiting the low temperature
changes of the refrigerant. The maximum temperature of current ammonia systems is app. 90° C, but
research is done to take the temperature even higher.

At the moment new compressor types for water vapour is being developed. The models available are
primarily for district cooling applications, meaning that the temperature is not suitable for heating
purposes. However as water vapour has a number of advantages (high efficiency compressors, non
toxic, non flammable, elimination of heat exchangers etc.), this technology is expected to be developed
for higher temperatures in the near future. For now, low temperature water vapour systems can be used
in combination with other system types, e.g. an H2O system recovering heat from sea water at 0° C and
delivering at 20° C, while an ammonia system takes the temperature from 20° C and delivers at a
higher temperature.

The Hybrid H2O/NH3 heat pump combines the absorption and the vapour compression cycles, hence
the name hybrid. The refrigerant NH3 is absorbed by H2O and condenses. But instead of using heat for
regenerating the water, a mechanical compressor is used for evaporating NH3 from the solution. As
ammonia is absorbed into water throughout the condenser, the ammonia concentration increase as the
water passes through the exchanger. This means that the condensing temperature decreases throughout
the heat exchanger, and vice versa in the evaporator. Because of this, the hybrid heat pump has
temperature glides on both warm and cold side, meaning that it is well suited for applications that can
utilize these glides. An example is recovering industrial waste heat by cooling process water from 40 –
10° C, while delivering the heat to a district heating system water is heated from 40 – 80° C. Currently
the maximum temperature is app. 130° C, but research is done to take the temperature even higher.

Besides the further development of natural refrigerants it is expected that technology development will
focus on:

 Higher outlet temperatures.


 Combinations of the different technologies, e.g. CO2 – Hybrid, H2O – NH3 etc.
 Optimise the benefits for the overall electricity system of using heat pumps.
 Increase the efficiencies of all types of heat pump systems.
 Use of heat pumps combined with combined heat and power production.
 Further development of heat pumps driven by natural gas.

Advantages/disadvantages compared to other technologies


A general advantage of heat pumps is that the heat pump is able to utilize energy at a low temperature
level. Additionally the heat pump is flexible concerning use of renewable energy, waste and surplus
heat. The combined utilization of a heat source at a low temperature level and the use of for example
gas as driving power enables more effective resource utilization compared with conventional heat
production technologies.

Compared with traditional heating technologies, heat pumps are more complex and have high
investments costs. However, this is counterbalanced by considerable savings in operating costs.

115
Environment
Harmless refrigerants are currently replacing the former previous refrigerants at large scale.

As heat pumps need drive energy (electricity, oil or gas) the environmental impact from using heat
pumps stems from the production and use of the drive energy.

Additional remarks
The data for „hot‟ heat pumps is based on a heat source of 35 C; otherwise the average outdoor
temperature is used as heat source. If other heat sources are used e.g. in connection with decentralised
CHP systems, the COP values would be considerably higher. This could be heat sources such as flue
gas cooling, heat from intercooler or waste heat from gas engines.

Investment cost of high temperature heat pumps in M€ per MJ/s, is typically the same for the different
technologies, when only the heat pump itself is considered.

Concerning financial data mentioned in the data sheets, the span of investment costs and O&M costs is
expected to cover the future. Investment costs are not expected to fall and O&M costs may increase
slightly in the future.

The total investment cost of a CO2 heat pump is comprised of (ref. 2):
Heat pump: 55-60%.
Container (no building): 3%
Connections and other costs: 35-40%.

Based on a single case, the total investment cost of an absorption heat pump for flue gas condensation
is comprised of (ref. 5):
Heat pump: 50%.
Pipe connections: 12%
Chimney anti-corrosion: 13%
Other costs: 25%.
In this case, there was already a steel chimney. This needed anti-corrosive protection.

References
1. Danish Technology Institute, 2011
2. Advansor, 2009
3. Presentation “Varmepumper i ATES”, DONG Energy, March 2009.
4. DONG Energy, October 2009.
5. Vestforbrænding, November 2009.

116
Data sheets

The following types and sizes are covered in this technology sheet:

Large heat pumps for district heating systems, heat source ambient temperature
Large heat pumps for district heating systems, heat source 35°C
Large absorption heat pumps – flue gas condensation (steam driven)
Large absorption heat pumps – geothermal (steam driven)

Technology Large heat pumps, electric (heat source: ambient


temperature)
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generation capacity for one unit (MJ/s heat) 1-10

Coefficient of performance 2,8 2,9 3 3,2 A 1,2


Forced outage (%)
Planned outage (weeks per year)
Technical lifetime (years) 20 20 20 20 1,2
Construction time (years) 0.5-1 0.5-1 0.5-1 0.5-1 1,2
Environment
Refrigerants neutral A
Financial data
Specific investment (M€ per MJ/s heat out) 0.52 - 0.84 0.47 - 0.79 0.42 - 0.73 0.37 - 0.68 C+D 1,2
Total O&M (€ per MJ/s heat out per year) 3700 - 7300 2400 - 4900 2400 - 4900 2400 - 4900 B+D 1

References:
1 Advansor 2009
2 "Varmepumper og lavtemperaturfjernvarme. Rapportering fra to workshops. Delrapportering fra EFP projekt:
Effektiv fjernvarme i fremtidens energisystem" (heat pumps and low temperature heat, workshop reports in
Danish), Ea Energianalyse A/S, Risø DTU, og RAM-løse edb og Dansk Fjernvarmes visionsudvalg, 2009.
Notes:
A It is assumed that CO2 is used as refrigerant. Supply temperature about 80C.
B A typical service contract is estimated 2,000-3,000 €/year, for the larger sizes. Furthermore an overall check is
needed for every 10000 hrs of operation costing approximately 1500 € per MJ/s out.
C These costs include pipes, electrical system, installation etc. It does not include buildings or storage tanks.
The heat pumps alone would cost between 0.3 and 0.5 M€ per MJ/s heat out.
D Cost data are the same as in the 2010 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2008 to 2011 by multiplying
with a general inflation factor 1.0478

117
Technology Large heat pumps, electric (heat source: 35 C)

2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref


Energy/technical data
Generation capacity for one unit (MJ/s heat) 1-10

Coefficient of performance 3,6 3,7 3,8 3,8 A 1,2


Forced outage (%)
Planned outage (weeks per year)
Technical lifetime (years) 20 20 20 20 1,2
Construction time (years) 0.5-1 0.5-1 0.5-1 0.5-1 1,2
Environment
Refrigerants neutral A
Financial data
Specific investment (M€ per MJ/s heat out) 0.47-0.89 0.42-0.84 0.37-0.79 0.31-0.73 C 1,2
Total O&M (€ per MJ/s heat out per year) 3700 - 7300 2400 - 4900 2400 - 4900 2400 - 4900 B+D 1

References:
1 Advansor 2009
2 "Varmepumper og lavtemperaturfjernvarme. Rapportering fra to workshops. Delrapportering fra EFP projekt:
Effektiv fjernvarme i fremtidens energisystem" (heat pumps and low temperature heat, workshop reports in
Danish), Ea Energianalyse A/S, Risø DTU, og RAM-løse edb og Dansk Fjernvarmes visionsudvalg, 2009.
Notes:
A It is assumed that CO2 is used as refrigerant. Supply temperature about 80C.
B Electricity consumption is excluded. A typical service contract is estimated 2,000-3,000 €/year, for the larger
sizes. Furthermore an overall check is needed for every 10000 hrs of operation costing approximately 1500 €
per MJ/s heat out.
C These costs include pipes, electrical system, construction etc. The heat pumps alone would cost between 0.3
and 0.5 M€ per MJ/s heat out.
D Cost data are the same as in the 2010 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2008 to 2011 by multiplying
with a general inflation factor 1.0478

118
Technology Large heat pumps, absorption (flue gas
condensation)
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generation capacity for one unit (MJ/s heat) 2-15
Coefficient of performance 1,7 1,75 1,8 1,85 A 1+2
Technical lifetime (years) 20 20 20 20
Construction time (years) 0.5-1 0.5-1 0.5-1 0.5-1
Environment
Refrigerants Ammonia - LiBr
Financial data
Specific investment (M€ per MJ/s heat out) 0.37-0.42 C 3+4
Total O&M (€ per MJ/s heat out per year) 16-21000 B+C 4

References:
1 Vestforbrænding presentation, Danish Committee for Waste (DAKOFA) conference, December 2007.
2 DONG Energy, October 2009.
3 "Total udnyttelse af energien i Bjerringbro" (total energy utilization in Bjerringbro; in Danish), Fjernvarmen
(Danish periodical for district heating), no. 1, 2008.
4 Vestforbrænding, November 2009.
Notes:
A Heat pumps used in connection with flue gas condensation to increase overall efficiency of MSW and
biomass plants. Condensation heat from the flue gas is used as heat input to raise the district heating
temperature from 40-60 C to about 80 C.
B 5% of initial investment per year. Almost all O&M cost is for for discharging the condensate water. However,
at Vestforbrænding (incinerator) this cost is zero, since all condensate water is reused in an acid scrubber
for flue gas cleaning (ref. 4). Cost of cleaning the condensate water before discharge is not included.
Manpower to operate the heatpump is insignificant.
Costs for steam to drive the heat pump and electricity for pumps etc. are not included.
The electricity consumption for internal pumps is about 1-2 % of the heat extracted from the heat source by
the evaporator (ref: 2+4).
C Cost data are the same as in the 2010 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2008 to 2011 by
multiplying with a general inflation factor 1.0478

119
41 ELECTRIC BOILERS

Brief technology description


An electric boiler is used for producing hot water directly from electricity. Two types of installations
are available:

The heating elements using electrical resistance (same principal as a hot water heater in a
normal household). Typically, electrical resistance is used for smaller applications up to 1-2
MW‟s. These electric boilers are connected at 400 V.
Heating elements using electrode boilers. Electrode systems are used for larger applications
(larger than a few MW‟s). In Denmark, larger electrode boilers (larger than a few MW‟s) are
connected at 10 kV.

The water in the electrode boiler is heated by means of an electrode system consisting of three-phase
electrodes, a neutral electrode and control screens. Power is fed to the electrodes which transfer it to the
water, thus heating the water.

The current from the phase electrodes flows directly through the water, which is heated in the process.
The current is a function of the active surface area of the electrodes and the water conductivity. The
active area of the electrodes can be infinitely varied by operating the control screens, thus enabling
output to be controlled between a minimum load of 10-20 % (depending on boiler size and voltage) and
100 %.

Input
Electricity.

Output
Heat (hot water).

Typical capacities
1 - 25 MW.

Regulation ability
The electrode boiler output can be adjusted by means of the control screens which are mounted on a
motor-driven gear shaft so that they can be moved up and down along the electrodes. In this way it is
possible to adjust the output from approx. 10-20% up to 100%.

Environment
The boiler has no local environmental impact. However, it uses electricity and the environmental
impact is highly dependent of the origin of the electricity.

120
Advantages/disadvantages
Due to its very simple design, the electric boiler is extremely dependable and easy to maintain. The
boiler has no built-in complex components which may impede operation and maintenance. The boiler
has quick start up and is easy to regulate. It requires no fuel feeding systems or stack. However, as it
uses electricity as fuel, the operating costs can be high compared to other boilers.

The investment costs are very dependent on the size of the boiler.

Research and development


The technology is well developed and tested and commercially available. Future development will
focus on dynamic use of electric boilers in connection with the power system.

Examples of best available technology


Swedish boiler manufacturer, Zander & Ingeström AB, distributed by Averhoff Energi Anlæg in
Denmark.
Swedish boiler manufacturer, Värmebaronen (smaller electric boilers up to 1.5 MW).

Special remarks
The operating costs of an electric boiler are highly dependent on the electricity price. Thus, heat
production from of electric boilers can only compete with other heat production units at low electricity
prices (i.e. at periods with high wind power production). Furthermore, electric boilers can be used for
upward or downward regulation in the power systems with short notice. For upward regulation the
electric boiler needs to be in operation to deliver this service.

The investment cost stated in the data sheet is without grid connection, which may more than double
the cost.

References
Averhoff Energi Anlæg, web page and personal communication 2009.
Zander & Ingeström AB, 2009.

121
Data sheet

The costs presented below do not include the installation of a hot water storage tank.

Technology Electric boilers


2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generation capacity for one unit (MW) 1-25
Efficiency (%) 99 99 99 99 1
Technical lifetime (years) 20 20 20 20
Construction time (years) 0.5-1 0.5-1 0.5-1 0.5-1
Environment
Local emissions - A
Financial data
Nominal investment (M€/MW); 400 V; 1-3 MW 0.13-0.16 0.13-0.16 0.13-0.16 0.13-0.16 B;C;D 2,3
Nominal investment (M€/MW); 10 kV; 10 MW 0.06-0.09 0.06-0.09 0.06-0.09 0.06-0.09 C;D 2,3,4
Nominal investment (M€/MW); 10 kV; 20 MW 0.05-0.07 0.05-0.07 0.05-0.07 0.05-0.07 C;D 2,3
Fixed O&M (€/MW per year) 1100 1100 1100 1100 D 2
Variable O&M (€/MWh) 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 D 2

References:
1 Zander & Ingeström AB, web page, October 2009
2 Averhoff Energi Anlæg, personal communication, May 2009
3 Security of supply for Bornholm, Integration of fluctuating generation using coordinated control of demand and
wind turbines, Demand side options for system reserves, Ea Energy Analyses 2007
4 "Erfaringer med centrale elpatroner og varmepumper", Jan Diget, Skagen Varmeværk at "Vind til varme og
transport", conference held by the Danish Wind Industry Association, October 22, 2009
5 JPH Energi A/S; 2008.
6 Energinet.dk, 2009.
Notes
A Environmental impacts depends on how the electricity for the boiler is produced.
B If this small boiler needs to take the electricity from a 10 kV grid, a transformer is required. This costs around 0.14
M€/MW (ref. 5).
C Costs do not include extra costs for connecting to the grid. Costs of strengthening the local grid and transformer-
station, if required, may be around 0.13 M€/MW (ref. 6).
D Cost data are the same as in the 2010 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2008 to 2011 by multiplying
with a general inflation factor 1.053

122
42 WASTE-TO-ENERGY DISTRICT HEATING PLANT

Brief technology description


The major components are: A waste reception area, a feeding system, a grate fired furnace
interconnected with a hot or warm water boiler, an extensive flue gas cleaning system and systems for
handling of combustion and flue gas treatment residues.

The plant is primarily designed for incineration of municipal solid waste (MSW) and similar non-
hazardous wastes from trade and industry. Some types of hazardous wastes may, however, also be
incinerated.

The waste is delivered by trucks and is normally incinerated in the state in which it arrives. Only bulky
items are shredded before being fed into the waste bunker.

Input
MSW and other combustible wastes, water and chemicals for flue gas treatment, gas oil or natural gas
for auxiliary burners (if installed).

The low heating value of MSW is (ref. 3):


Europe: 7,500 – 10,500 kJ/kg
Japan: 5,000 – 10,500 kJ/kg
USA: 9,000 – 15,000 kJ/kg

In Copenhagen, the heating value has increased from 9.8 kJ/kg in 2004 to 10.5 kJ/kg in 2008 and is
expected to further increase to 11.5 kJ/kg by 2025.

Output
Heat as hot (> 120 oC) or warm (<120 oC) water, bottom ash (slag), residues from flue gas treatment,
including fly ash. If the flue gas is treated by wet methods, there may also be an output of treated
process wastewater.

Typical capacities
5-15 tonnes of waste per hour, corresponding to a thermal input in the range 15-50 MJ/s. Plants larger
than 15 tonnes/hour would typically be designed for combined heat and power.

Regulation ability
The plants can be down regulated to 60% of the nominal capacity, but for emissions control reasons
they should be operated at base load.

Advantages/disadvantages
By incinerating the non-recyclable, combustible waste its energy content is utilised thereby replacing
equivalent quantities of energy generated on fossil fuels. Moreover, the waste is sterilised, and its

123
volume greatly reduced. The remaining waste (bottom ash/slag) may be utilised in construction works,
and it will no longer generate methane. Consequently, by incinerating the waste, the methane emission
generated, when landfilling the same quantity of waste, is avoided.

The disadvantages are that a polluted flue gas is formed, requiring extensive treatment, and that the flue
gas treatment generates residues, which are classified as hazardous waste.

Environmental aspects
The incineration of MSW involves the generation of climate-relevant emissions. These are mainly
emissions of CO2 as well as N2O, NOx and NH3. CH4 is not generated in waste incineration during
normal operation.

Waste is a mixture of CO2 neutral biomass and products of fossil origin, such as plastics. A typical CO2
emission factor is 37.0 kg/GJ for the waste mixture currently incinerated in Denmark.

To comply with European Union requirements (Directive 2000/76) the flue gas must be heated to min.
850 oC for min. 2 seconds and the gas must be treated for NOx, dust (fly ash), HCl, HF, SO2, dioxins
and heavy metals. If HCl, HF and SO2 are removed by wet processes, the wastewater must be treated to
fulfil some specific water emission limit values.

The solid residues from flue gas and water treatment are hazardous wastes and are often placed in an
underground storage for hazardous waste (cf. Council Decision 2003/33).

Ecological footprints are: air and water emissions including dioxins as well as solid residues to be
disposed of.

Research and development


There is a potential of increasing the energy efficiency of waste fired district-heating plants by
application of condensation of flue gas moisture.

Further challenges are the amount and quality of the residues (bottom ash, fly ash and flue gas cleaning
residue). The continued use of bottom ash for road construction etc. is expected to take place under
tightening demands on the contents and leachability of a range of pollutants, including salts, heavy
metals and dioxin.

Similarly, the amount of hazardous waste (fly ash and flue gas cleaning residue) may be reduced by
optimisation of the overall process. Also, treatment of residues may be further developed for recycling
and/or disposal in landfills not dedicated for hazardous waste.

Special remarks
The primary objective of a waste-to-energy plant is the treatment of waste, energy production may be
considered a useful by-product. Contrary to other fuels used for energy generation, waste usually has a
negative price, as it is received at a gate fee. The socio-economic price may be negative or positive,
much dependent on how it is calculated.

124
By condensing most of the water vapour content of the flue gas in the flue gas treatment, a thermal
efficiency (based on the net calorific value) of around 100% is achievable. At the same time the plant
becomes self-sufficient in water.

References
1. Kleis, H. and Dalager, S.: 100 Years of Waste Incineration in Denmark. Babcock & Wilcox
Vølund and RAMBØLL, 2004.
2. Lov om CO2-kvoter, LOV nr.493 af 09/06/2004. (Law of the Danish parliament on CO2-
allowance trading, cf. Directive 2003/87/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of
13 October 2003 establishing a scheme for greenhouse gas emission allowance trading within
the Community and amending Council Directive 96/61/EC)
3. Affald 21, Miljø- og Energiministeriet, 1999, "Waste 21".

125
Data sheet

Technology Waste to energy, district heating


2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Waste treatment capacity (tonnes/h) 15 15 15 1
Thermal input (MJ/s) 50.0 50.0 50.0 1
Own consumption (MW) 1.2 1.2 1.2 1
Total efficiency (%) gross 98 100 100 A 1
Total efficiency (%) net 95.6 97.6 97.6 A 1
Start-up fuel consumption (GJ) 1080 1080 1080 1
Time for varm start-up (hours) 12 12 12 1
Forced outage (%) 1 1 1 1
Planned outage (weeks per year) 3 3 3 1
Technical lifetime (years) 20 20 20 1
Construction time (years) 3 3 3 1
Environment
SO2 (degree of desulphurisation, %) 98.0 98.4 98.4 1
NOX (g per GJ fuel) 164 164 164 164 2;3;3;3
CH4 (g per GJ fuel) 6 6 6 6 2;3;3;3
N2O (g per GJ fuel) 4 4 4 4 2;3;3;3
Financial data
Specific investment (M€/MW) 1.2 1.1 1.1 B 1
Fixed O&M (€/MW/year) 54000 53000 53000 B 1
Variable O&M (€/MWh) 5.6 5.4 5.4 B 1
Regulation ability
Minimum load (% of full load) 75 75 75 1

References:
1 Rambøll Danmark, September 2004
2 National Environmental Research Institute, Denmark, 2009 (data from 2007).
3 Danish Energy Agency, 2011
Notes:
A With flue gas condensation
B Cost data are the same as in the 2005 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2002 to
2011 by multiplying with a general inflation factor 1.2306

126
43 DISTRICT HEATING BOILER, BIOMASS FIRED

Brief technology description


Boiler fired by wood-chips from forestry and/or from wood industry, wood pellets or straw.

If the moisture content of the fuel is above 30-35%, as with forest wood-chips, flue gas condensation
should be employed. Thereby the thermal efficiency usually exceeds 100 % (based on lower heating
value). The efficiency is primarily determined by the condensation temperature, which is little above
the return temperature from the district heating network. In well-designed systems, this return
temperature is below 40 oC, yielding efficiencies above 105 %.

For plants firing wood-chips with 45 – 55 % moisture content, the thermal efficiency exceeds 110 %.
Some plants are equipped with cooling devices for full flue gas condensation and thermal efficiencies
of more than 120 % are reached (ref. 3).

Flue gas condensation should not be applied to plants below 1 - 2 MJ/s due to O&M costs. Such plants
should only use fuels drier than 30 % moisture content (ref. 3).

Straw fired boilers are normally equipped with a bag filter for flue gas cleaning. Electro filters do not
work with straw firing as they do with wood firing.

Flue gas condensation is now available also for straw firing but must be combined with a bag filter to
hold back calcium chlorine particles from the scrubber. The flue gas condensation raises the efficiency
with 5-10 % and reduces SO2 emission to a minimum, when the pH value is kept above 6.5 – 7.0 (ref.
3). Whether flue condensation is feasible is much dependent on taxes, e.g. on sulphur.

Input
Wood chips are wood pieces of 5-50 mm in the fibre direction, longer twigs (slivers), and a fine
fraction (fines). The quality description is based on three types of wood chips: Fine, coarse, and extra
coarse. The names refer to the size distribution only, not to the quality.

Existing district heating boilers in Denmark can burn wood-chips with up to 45-63 % moisture content,
depending on technology. In 1993, the actual moisture content was 42 % in average, varying between
32 and 48 % (ref. 1).

The wood-chips are often traded in two size qualities, coarse and fine.

Other possible fuels are chipped energy crops (e.g. willow and poplar) and chipped park and garden
waste.

Wood pellets are made from sawdust, wood shavings and other residues from sawmils and other wood
manufacturers. Pellets are produced in several types and grades as fuels for electric power plants and

127
district heating (low grade), and homes (high grade). Pellets are extremely dense and can be produced
with a low humidity content (below 5 % for high grade products) that allows easy handling (incl. long-
term storage) and to be burned with a high combustion efficiencies.

Straw is a by-product from the growing of commercial crops, in North Europe primarily cereal grain,
rape and other seed-producing crops. Straw is often delivered as big rectangular bales, approx. 5-700
kg each, from stores at the farms to the district heating plants etc. during the year depending on crop
delivery contracts.

Output
District heat or heat for industrial processes.

Typical capacities
1 - 50 MJ/s.

Regulation ability
Typical wood fired pants are regulated 25 - 100% of full capacity, without violating emission
standards. The best technologies can be regulated 10 - 120% with fuel not exceeding 35 % moisture
content.

Straw fired plants should not be operated below approx. 50 % of full load due to emission standards.
Straw fired plants should accordingly be equipped with an accumulating tank allowing for optimal
operational conditions.

Environment
NOx emissions may be reduced, by about 60-70%, by selective non-catalytic reduction (SNCR). For a
district heating plant size 4-8 MJ/s, this would cost about 0.1 M€ in investment and 400 € pr. tonne
NOx in operational cost (ref. 4).

Biomass fired boilers produce four sorts of residues: Flue gas, fly ash, bottom ash, and possibly
condensate from flue gas condensation.

All bottom ash and most fly ash from straw firing are recycled to farm land as a fertilizer.
Almost all ash from wood firing is dumped in landfills. Research is ongoing on how to carbonize the
ash for recycling to the forests.

The condensate water from wood firing is usually treated for Cadmium, so that the content reaches 3 –
10 grams per 1000 m3. The sludge must be deposited in a safe landfill.
Condensate from straw-firing can be expelled without cleaning, as almost all Cadmium is withheld
with the fly ash in the bag filter.

Research and development


There is still a need for R&D in the following areas:
environmentally safe recycling of ashes to forestry; e.g. by pellets to ensure slow release of
nutrients;

128
reduction of aerosols and NOx;
handling and combustion of new types of fuels, such as energy crops and garden waste.

Examples of best available technology


Danish manufacturers of best available technology for wood firing are Justsen A/S, Weiss A/S,
Eurotherm A/S and Hollensen Energy A/S, while the newest operational plants can be visited in the
cities of Brande, Sønderborg, Fuglebjerg and Nykøbing Falster (REFA).

Danish manufacturers of best available technology for straw firing are Weiss A/S, Eurotherm A/S,
Hollensen Energy A/S and Lin-Ka Energy A/S, while the newest operational plants can be visited in
the cities of Øster Toreby, Høng, Ringsted and Terndrup.

Danish manufacturer of best available technology for cleaning of flue gas condensate is AL-2 Teknik
A/S (ref. 3).

References
1. Videncenter for Halm og Flis-fyring. anlægs- og driftsdata for flisfyrede varmeværker. 1994.
2. Videncenter for Halm og Flis-fyring. Træ til energiformål. 1999.
3. Danish District Heating Association, January 2012.
4. "En opdateret analyse af Danmarks muligheder for at reducere emissionerne af NOx" (Updated
analysis of Denmark's options to reduce NOx emissions; in Danish), Danish Environmental
Protection Agency, 2009.

129
Data sheets

Technology District heating boiler, wood-chips

2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref


Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one plant (MJ/s) 1 - 12 1 - 12 1 - 12 1
Total efficiency (%) net 108 108 108 1
Availability (%) 96-98 96-98 96-98 2
Technical lifetime (years) 20 20 20 1
Construction time (years) 0.5 - 1 0.5 - 1 0.5 - 1 2
Environment
SO2 (g per GJ fuel) 1.9 1.9 1.9 1.9 4;3;3;3
NOX (g per GJ fuel) 81 81 81 81 4;3;3;3
Unburned hydrocarbon, UHC (g per GJ 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 4;3;3;3
fuel)
N2O (g per GJ fuel) 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 4;3;3;3
Financial data
Nominal investment (M€ per MJ/s) 0.5 - 1.1 0.5 - 1.1 0.5 - 1.1 1
Total O&M (€/MWh) 5.4 5.4 5.4 1

References:
1 Danish District Heating Association, January 2012
2 Elsams og Elkrafts opdatering af Energistyrelsens 'Teknologidata for el- og
varmeproduktionsanlæg', 1997
3 Danish Energy Agency and Energinet.dk, 2011
4 "Emisions map for combined heat and power production 2007", National Environmental Research
Institute, Denmark, 2010.

130
Technology District heating boiler, wood-pellets

2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref


Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one plant (MJ/s) <2 A
Total efficiency (%) net
Availability (%)
Technical lifetime (years)
Construction time (years)
Environment
SO2 (degree of desulphuring, %)
NOX (g per GJ fuel)
CH4 (g per GJ fuel)
N2O (g per GJ fuel)
Financial data
Nominal investment (M€ per MJ/s) 0.25 - 0.55 0.25 - 0.55 0.25 - 0.55 1
Total O&M (€/MWh) 2.7 2.7 2.7 1

References:
1 Danish District Heating Association, January 2012
Notes:
A Wood pellets are not attractive for plants above 1-2 MJ/s, since alternative fuels are much cheaper, when it
comes to larger plants.

131
Technology District heating boiler, straw

2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref


Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one plant (MJ/s) 1 - 12 1 - 12 1 - 12 1
Total efficiency (%) net
Availability (%)
Technical lifetime (years)
Construction time (years)
Environment
SO2 (g per GJ fuel) 49 49 49 49 2;3;3;3
NOX (g per GJ fuel) 125 125 125 125 2;3;3;3
Unburned hydrocarbon, UHC (g per GJ 0.94 0.94 0.94 0.94 2;3;3;3
fuel)
N2O (g per GJ fuel) 1.1 1.1 1.1 1.1 2;3;3;3
Financial data
Nominal investment (M€ per MJ/s) 0.5 - 1.1 0.5 - 1.1 0.5 - 1.1 A 1
Total O&M (€/MWh) 4.0 4.0 4.0 1

References:
1 Danish District Heating Association, January 2012
2 "Emisions map for combined heat and power production 2007", National Environmental Research
Institute,Energy
3 Danish Denmark, 2010.
Agency and Energinet.dk, 2011
Notes:
A Small units, up to 2 MJ/s, may be cheaper (around 0.4 - 0.8 M€ per MJ/s), when designed with semi-
automatic fuel handling. However, manual storage increases operation costs (ref. 1).

132
44 DISTRICT HEATING BOILER, GAS FIRED

Brief technology description


The fuel is burnt in the furnace section. Heat from the flames and the exhaust gas is used to heat water
in the boiler section.

Boilers for district heating have been used for decades. Today most boilers are used for peak-load or
back-up capacity and for balancing the electric production at CHP plants when market prices for
electricity are low.

Boilers may be equipped with supplementary economizer to reduce heat loss through the flue gas.

Input
Natural gas, with heavy fuel oil or gas oil as back-up fuel.

Output
District heat.

Typical capacities
0.5-20 MJ/s.

Environment
The only residue results from scales2.

Research and development


It is a commercial technology with insignificant need for R&D.

2
The hard greyish-white material sometimes deposited inside the furnace section, pipes, etc by water when it is heated.

133
Data sheet

Technology District heating boiler, gas fired

2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref


Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one plant (MJ/s) 0.5 - 10 0.5 - 10 0.5 - 10 2
Total efficiency (%) net 97 - 105 97 - 105 97 - 105 A 5
Availability (%) 98 - 99 98 - 99 98 - 99 2
Technical lifetime (years) 30 - 40 30 - 40 30 - 40 2
Construction time (years) 0.5 - 1 0.5 - 1 0.5 - 1 1
Environment (Fuel: natural gas)
NOX (g per GJ fuel) 10 - 13 9 - 12 8 - 11 7 - 10 5
CH4 (g per GJ fuel) <3 <3 <3 <3 5
N2O (g per GJ fuel) 1 1 1 1 4;3;3;3
Financial data
Nominal investment (M€ per MJ/s) 0.07 - 0.13 0.07 - 0.13 0.07 - 0.13 2
Total O&M (€ per MJ/s per year) 1200 - 6200 1200 - 6200 1200 - 6200 1

References:
1 Elsams og Elkrafts opdatering af Energistyrelsens 'Teknologidata for el- og varmeproduktionsanlæg', 1997
2 Danish District Heating Association, 2012
3 Danish Energy Agency, 2009
4 National Environmental Research Institute, Denmark, 2009 (data from 2007).
5 Danish Gas Technology Centre, 2012
Notes:
A The highest efficiencies are due to flue gas condensation.

134
45 GEOTHERMAL DISTRICT HEATING

Brief description
Geothermal energy is energy located in underground water reservoirs of the earth. In average the
temperature of the reservoir increases with around 3 ºC per 100 m depth. Recent definitions of
geothermal energy include all heat from the ground. Only heat produced through deep wells is
described.

Heat from deep reservoirs can be utilized directly through a heat exchanger. However, both the
temperature and the pumping costs increase with the depth. From Danish experiences it is thus
economically more attractive to use heat pumps
and extract heat from higher reservoirs, typically at
800-3000 m depth, where temperatures are 30-90
o
C. The heat pumps can either be compressor heat
pumps driven with electricity or absorption heat
pumps driven by heat. The geothermal water is
saline - often with 10-20% salinity.

In the doublet design, warm geothermal water is


pumped to the surface from a production well and
the heat depleted brine pumped back into the
source reservoir via an injection well; the bottom-
hole spacing is designed to avoid premature
cooling of the production well.
The principle of the doublet design
(ref: www.geotermi.dk).

Several boreholes may also be drilled from one site. This will decrease the cost of heat. Also, one or
more of the boreholes may then be used for heat storage, e.g. seasonal, by injection of hot water during
the summer and production during winter. Stored hot water can increase well capacities. The storage of
hot water may, however, carry precipitation problems and change reservoir properties, and a study is
planned to assess benefits and problems associated with heat storage (ref. 2).

Absorption heat pumps driven by district heating biomass boilers can be used to elevate the
temperature of the produced heat and increase the heat extraction, e.g. cooling the reinjected water to
10-20 oC. In some cases the cooling by heat pumps can help to reduce gas separation (from the water)
and avoid precipitation, which may clog the reinjection well.

Heat produced from deep wells in Denmark can be divided into the following systems:

Heat for district heating

135
Heat from saline water in porous sandstone layers, typically 1000-2500 meters below surface.
From these reservoirs it is possible to reach temperatures of 30-80 ºC. The geothermal system
consists of a production well, heat exchangers and/or heat pumps transferring heat into the
district-heating network and a reinjection well returning the cooled water to the same reservoir
maintaining the reservoir pressure.
Heat for district heating including storage and use of stored heat at elevated temperature.
Geothermal aquifers found suitable for heat storage may be used to store heat at elevated
temperature levels increasing production capacities and temperatures (ref. 2).

Geothermal district heating (GDH) in Europe is nearing a total capacity of 5,000 MJ/s. The two largest
schemes address the heating of the city of Reykjavik and of the Paris suburban area.

GDH provides almost all of Reykjavik‟s district heating demand with an installed capacity of 830 MJ/s
serving 180,000 people, 60 million m3/year of water at an average 75°C (user inlet) temperature. An
important part of the hot water supply is piped from distant wells and there is no reinjection of the heat
depleted water (ca 35°C) underground.

The Paris Basin GDH system is based on a sedimentary resource and on the doublet concept of heat
extraction. Here, hot water at an average temperature of 70°C is pumped from depths of 1500 to 1800
m. The thirty-four geothermal doublets (and as many heating grids), operating since the early 1980‟s in
the Paris area, totalise installed power and generating capacities of 230 MJ/s and 1,000 GWh/year
respectively (ref. 3).

About 10 GW electricity generation capacity is installed in the World, primarily as base load (ref. 2).

Input
Heat from brine (saline water) from underground reservoirs.

Output
Heat for district heating.
Electricity, if geothermal temperatures are high.

Typical capacities
10-15 MW per production well without heat storage

Regulation ability
Making an optimised geothermal energy system the general experience is that the geothermal energy
should be used as base load, e.g. covering 1/3 of the total district heat supply. The main reason is
economy.

Research and development


Heat extraction from hot dry rock layers at e.g. 3000-4000 meters below surface is yet to be
investigated in Denmark. The challenge is to increase the extremely small natural fractures, allowing
water to be heated to temperature levels, where it can be used for power production.

136
Heat storage is planned investigated in Denmark - both seasonal heat storage of e.g. solar heat and
short-term storage.

Better utilization of the geothermal resources could be achieved through lowering the district heating
temperatures.

Advantages/disadvantages compared to other technologies


Advantages:
Established technology for heat production for district heating
Cheap running costs and “fuel” for free
Renewable energy source and environmental friendly technology with low CO2 emission
High operation stability and long lifetime
Potential for combination with heat storage.

Disadvantages:
No security for success before the first well is drilled and the reservoir has been tested
High initial costs
The best reservoirs not always located near cities
Need access to base-load heat demand

Environment
Utilization of geothermal energy is very CO2 friendly. Pumps pumping the geothermal water typically
use power equal to 5-10% of the heat from the geothermal water and CO2 emission depends primarily
on how the heat pump is powered.

Examples of best available technology


Application of seasonal heat storage has been successfully demonstrated in Neubrandenburg, Germany
(ref. 1).

A geothermal plant in Thisted, Denmark, has produced heat since 1984 producing heat for district
heating. 7 MJ/s heat is extracted from 44 °C thermal water by absorption heat pumps driven by a straw
based district heating boiler.

Additional remarks
An example of a system with an absorption heat pump is illustrated below. The numbers indicate the
energy flows relative to the extracted amount of geothermal heat, 100 energy units:

137
Forward
176
District heating 130 Heat 76
Steam
network pump

54
Return 46

Pump
Heat
8 exchanger
100
Extraction borehole Re-injection borehole

Part of the geothermal heat (46) is used for direct heating of the return water from the district heating
network, while the remainder (54) is used as heat source for the heat pump (the figure is very
simplified, as some return water and all of the water from the heat exchanger is heated inside the heat
pump plant). The COP (heat out / drive energy) of the heat pump is 130/76 = 1.7. Thus, the total heat
output of the system equals the geothermal input plus the drive energy: 100 + 76 = 176.

The steam to drive the absorption heat pump (76 energy units) may be delivered by a district heating
plant (e.g. biomass or waste incineration). If the drive steam is delivered by a combined-heat-and-
power plant, the extracted steam will cause a decrease in electricity generation.

Electricity consumption for the geothermal circulation pumps is normally 5-10% of the heat extracted
from the geothermal water.

Investment cost structure of typical geothermal plants in Denmark (ref. 2):

Exploration 2%
Wells, well tests 46%
Geothermal surface loop 15%
Heat pump plant 29%
Interest during construction 7%
Total 100%

The heat generation costs depend primarily on geological data (depth, porosity and temperature) and
the heat system (heat demand, duration curve and forward/return temperatures). A heat demand
exceeding 300 – 500 TJ annually with access to supply base load is normally required.

138
Electric heat pumps can in some cases extract more geothermal energy than absorption heat pumps.
They may cool the geothermal water below the approx. 10-20°C obtainable using absorption heat
pumps and their drive energy may constitute a smaller part of the heat output. On the other hand
electricity is in general substantially more expensive than heat, making electric heat pumps more
expensive to operate.

An example of a system with an electric heat pump is illustrated below.

Forward
117
District heating 78 Heat 17
Electricity
network pump

61
Return 39

Pump
Heat
9 exchanger
100
Extraction borehole Re-injection borehole

139
References
1) “Geotermi – Varme fra jordens indre” (Geothermal energy – Heat from inside the Earth; in
Danish); Danish Energy Agency, October 2009.
2) Dansk Fjernvarmes Geotermiselskab, 2011, including www.geotermi.dk
3) The European Geothermal Energy Council, www.egec.org

Data sheets:

Two examples are given. In both cases, steam from a district heating plant is used to drive the
absorption heat pump. The heat content of the steam would otherwise have been supplied directly to
the district heating network at the same cost, and it has therefore been ignored in the economic data.

Technology Geothermal heat-only plant with steam-driven absorption


heat pump, Denmark
2010 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Temperature of geothermal heat (degrees C) 70 1
Heat from geothermal source (MJ/s) 15 15 15 1
Steam demand, heat pump (MJ/s) 11 11 11 1
Heat generation capacity (MJ/s) 26 26 26 1
District heat forward temperature, winter (C) 80 80 80 1
Electricity consumption for surface pumps etc. 1.2 1.2 1.2 1
(MW)
Electricity consumption for submerged pumps 1.2 1.2 1.2 1
etc. (MW)
Technical lifetime (years) 25 25 25 1
Construction time (years) 4-5 4-5 4-5 1
Financial data
Specific investment (M€ per MJ/s geothermal 1.8 1.8 1.8 1
heat)
O&M excl. electricity consumption (€/year per 47000 47000 47000 1
MJ/s geothermal heat)

References:
1 Dansk Fjernvarmes Geotermiselskab, 2011

140
Technology Geothermal heat-only plant with steam-driven absorption
heat pump, Denmark
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Temperature of geothermal heat (degrees C) 50 1
Heat from geothermal source (MJ/s) 13 13 13 1
Steam demand, heat pump (MJ/s) 14 14 14 1
Heat generation capacity (MJ/s) 27 27 27 1
District heat forward temperature, winter (C) 80 80 80 1
Electricity consumption for pumps etc. (MW) 0.61 0.61 0.61 1
Technical lifetime (years) 25 25 25 1
Construction time (years) 4-5 4-5 4-5 1
Financial data
Specific investment (M€ per MJ/s geothermal heat) 2.0 2.0 2.0 1
O&M excl. electricity consumption (€/year per MJ/s 49000 49000 49000 1
geothermal heat)

References:
1 Dansk Fjernvarmes Geotermiselskab, 2011

141
Technology Geothermal heat-only plant with electric heat pump,
Denmark
2010 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Temperature of geothermal heat (degrees C) 70 1
Heat from geothermal source (MJ/s) 64 64 64 1
Electricity demand, heat pump (MW) 5.7 5.7 5.7 1
Heat generation capacity (MJ/s) 74 74 74 1
District heat forward temperature, winter (C) 85 85 85 1
Electricity consumption for pumps etc. (MW) 11 11 11 1
Technical lifetime (years) 25 25 25 1
Construction time (years) 4-5 4-5 4-5 1
Financial data
Specific investment (M€ per MJ/s geothermal heat) 1.6 1.6 1.6 2
O&M excl. electricity consumption (€/year per MJ/s 37000 34000 34000 2
geothermal heat)

References:
1 Dansk Fjernvarmes Geotermiselskab, 2011
2 Estimated by Danish Energy Agency and Energinet.dk, 2011.

142
46 SOLAR DISTRICT HEATING

Brief technology description


Using the sun‟s energy to heat water is not a new idea. Today, more than 30 million m2 of solar
collectors are installed around the globe (ref. 1).

Solar heating systems use solar collectors and a liquid handling unit to transfer heat to the load,
generally via a store. When properly designed, solar collectors can work when the outside temperature
is well below freezing, and they are also protected from overheating on hot, sunny days.

This technology sheet deals only with large installations used for producing heat to district heating
systems. All such systems have additional heat generating capacity to ensure that all of the consumers‟
heating needs are met, when there is insufficient sunshine. This is typically heat-only boilers or
combined heat and power plants.

Input
Solar radiation.

The seasonal variation of heat generation from typical solar collectors in Denmark is shown in the
below figure (ref. 3):

Output
District heat.

Typical capacities
There are (end of 2011) about 25 solar district heating systems in Denmark, from 1,000 to 35,000 m2 of
solar collectors. All of them have located the solar collectors on the ground.

143
Research and development
Danish priorities are (ref. 2):
High-efficiency solar collectors
Seasonal heat storage, concepts and materials
Integration of solar heating plants with other heat generating technologies

Examples of best available technology


Brædstrup, Denmark: A combined energy system including 8000 m2 of solar collectors, 2000
m3 heat storage tank, a natural gas fired engine (combined heat and power production) and
natural gas fired heat-only boilers. Also an advanced control system, balancing maximum solar
heat and maximum electricity sales. Solar coverage: 9%. Established in 2007.

Special remarks
A typical Danish system with a short-term heat store of 0.1 - 0.3 m3 per m2 solar collector covers 10 –
25% of the annual heat demand (ref. 4).

Some systems also have seasonal heat stores (cf. Technology element ‟70 Seasonal heat storage‟).
Under Danish climatic conditions, a district heating system, which is based entirely on solar energy,
needs a seasonal store with a volume of about 4 m3 per m2 of solar collector, provided a heat pump is
installed to empty the store. The below figure shows indicative data for the storage requirement as a
function of solar heat coverage:

The heat coverage (horizontal axis) is the annual supply of solar heat in percent of
total heat demand. The storage requirement (vertical axis) is expressed as store
3 2
volume V (m ) divided by solar collector area A (m ) (ref. 4).

References
1. “Solar Water Heating Project Analysis”, RETScreen International (www.retscreen.net), 2004.
2. “Solvarme – status og strategi” (Solar heating – status and strategy), Danish Energy Agency and
Energinet.dk, May 2007.
3. Arcon Solvarme, 2008.
4. Planenergi, 2009.

144
Data sheet

Technology Solar district heating


2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Collector output, MWh/m2/year 0.5 0.5 A 1
Technical lifetime, years 30 30 30 3
Financial data
Cost of solar collectors, pipes 227 156 1
included, €/m2
Investment cost of total solar
system, € pr MWh/year
Without heat store 425 386 307 C 1
With diurnal heat store included 461 422 342 C 1
O&M costs, €/MWh 0.57 0.57 0.57 B+C 2

References:
1 Danish Energy Agency, 2010.
2 "Fact sheet on solar heat" (in Danish), www.solvarmecenter.dk; 2009.
3 "Life expectancy of solar collectors in solar district heating systems", Department of Civil
Engineering, Technical University of Denmark, 2009.
Notes:
A The yield is very site-specific, depending much on the temperatures of the district heating
network. The quoted yield is for a typical Danish installation without a heat pump to
decrease the inlet temperature.
B Electricity consumption included; maintenance is around 0.14 €/MWh
C Cost data are the same as in the 2010 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2008
to 2011 by multiplying with a general inflation factor 1.053

145
50 PUMPED HYDRO STORAGE

Brief technology description


For bulk electricity storage in utility grids, pumped hydro power plants dominate, with approximately
100 GW in service around the globe (ref. 2).

A typical pumped hydro store (PHS) consists of two water reservoirs (lakes), tunnels that convey water
from one reservoir to another, a reversible pump-turbine, a motor-generator, transformers, and
transmission connection. The amount of stored electricity is proportional to the product of the volume
of water and the height between the reservoirs. As an example, storing 1,000 MWh requires an
elevation change of 300 m and a water volume of about 1.4 million m3.

A new PHS, including dams, has high capital expenditures and a long construction time. If an existing
hydro plant is extended to also be a PHS, the investment per installed MW is significantly lower and
the construction time between 2 and 3 years.

With this technology electricity is basically stored as potential energy. Others ways of storing
electricity as potential energy may have similar characteristics.

Input
Electricity

Output
Electricity

Typical capacities
PHS facilities are dependent on local geography and currently have capacities up to 1,000 MW. In
addition to large variations in capacities PHS is also very divers regarding characteristics such as the
discharge time, which is ranging from several hours to a few days. Efficiency typically is in the range
of 70 % to 80 %, due to the losses in the process of pumping water up into the reservoirs.

Regulation ability
The primary intent of PHS is to provide peaking energy each day. However, their duty can be expanded
to include ancillary service functions, such as frequency regulation in the generation mode. A variable-
speed system design allows providing ancillary service capability in the pumping mode as well, which
increases overall plant efficiency (ref. 2).

Advantages/disadvantages
The advantage of PHS is the large volumes compared to other storages e.g. various batteries. In
addition PHS does not use fossil fuel such as e.g. CAES.

146
A disadvantage with PHS is the need for differences in height between the two reservoirs. When a new
PHS is not built in connection with an existing hydropower plant there are also environmental concerns
in flooding large areas.

Research and development


In the 1890's PHS was first used in Italy and Switzerland. After over 100 years of development PHS is
considered to be a mature technology. New developments include seawater pumped hydro storage that
was built in Japan in 1999 (Yanbaru, 30 MW). It is also technically possible to have a pumped
underground storage by using flooded mine shafts or other cavities.

A new (2009) Danish concept is storing electricity as potential energy by elevating sand. The sand is
lifted by pumping water into a balloon underneath the sand, and then lowered by taking the water out
through the pump, now acting as a turbine.

Additional remarks
There are frequently several hydro power plants on the same river, and the operation of these plants is
to some degree interlinked. The benefits of a new PHS therefore depend also on the existing
hydropower infrastructure.

For new large hydropower plants in OECD countries, capital costs are about 2400 USD/kW and
generating costs around 0.03-0.04 USD/kWh. The cost of pumped storage systems depends on their
configuration and use. They may be up to twice as expensive as an equivalent unpumped hydropower
system. Depending on cycling rates, their generating costs may be similar to those of unpumped
systems (ref. 1).

References
1. “Energy technology perspectives 2008”, International Energy Agency, 2008.
2. “Capturing Power Grid”, IEEE Power & Energy Magazine, July/August 2009,
http://www.electricitystorage.org/images/uploads/docs/captureGrid.pdf

147
Data sheet

Technology Pumped hydro storage


2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit (MW) 10-1000 10-1000 10-1000 10-1000 A 2
Total efficiency (%) net 70 - 80 70 - 80 70 - 80 70 - 80 A 1
Technical lifetime (years) 50 50 50 50 A 1
Construction time (years) 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 A
Financial data
Investment, pump part (M€/MW) 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 B;C;A 1&2
Investment, total, greenfield plant (M€/MW) <4 <4 <4 <4 D;A 4
Fixed O&M (€/MW/year) - 1-2% of investment 6-12,000 6-12,000 6-12,000 6-12,000 B;A 3
Variable O&M (€/MWh) Depends on power price

References:
1 BKK, presentation on Nygard Pumpekraftverk
2 Tonstad Pumpekraftverk, Sira-Kvina kraftselskap, 2002
3 BKK and Sira-Kvina
4 “Energy technology perspectives 2008”, International Energy Agency, 2008.
Notes:
A No significant technology advance or cost decrease is expected, since hydropower and water pumping are
established technologies.
B Based on the September 2004 exchange rate of 1NOK = 0,12€
C Cost data are the same as in the 2005 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2002 to 2011 by
multiplying with a general inflation factor 1.2306
D Cf. paragraph 'Additional remarks' above.

148
51 COMPRESSED AIR ENERGY STORAGE

Brief technology description


Compressed air energy storage (CAES) is a technology for large-scale electricity storage. Air is
compressed, preferably at times with low electricity prices, and injected into an underground store for
later use. The underground geological formation may be a mine, a salt cavern, or a depleted gas well.
When needed, the stored air is used together with gas to produce electricity.

In a conventional industrial gas turbine the compressor and turbine are operating on the same axis. The
compression typically accounts for up to 2/3 of the total energy input. The generator output is therefore
fairly small compared to the power generated by the turbine.

The basic concept of a CAES power plant is to split the gas turbine into a compressor unit for
compressing the combustion air and an expansion turbine to generate mechanical power to drive a
generator. This enables the utilization of the full capacity of the turbine, while leaving the compressor
idle in periods of high demand.

CAES is characterized by being built in modules in form of a) compressors for air injection capacity; b)
turbines/generator for withdrawal capacity; and c) underground storage for storage capacity. The
storage can therefore be formed to a specific need, by altering one of these variables. This means that
the storage is very flexible e.g. the storage capacity (can be doubled by creating another cavern) and the
relationship between the loading and consuming time can also be easily altered. The numbers
mentioned in the data sheets are only example of how the storage configuration can be.

Since a CAES plant uses fuel to heat air during the discharge generation cycle, it is not truly a „pure‟
energy storage plant such as pumped hydro and batteries. In general, a CAES plant provides
approximately 25-60% more electricity to the grid during on-peak times than it uses for compression
during off-peak times (ref. 5).

Theoretically, all heat generated during compression could be recovered and used later to reheat the
stored air during the generation cycle to eliminate the fuel consumption. However, this is rather costly
and presently being researched only, and the table below therefore assumes no heat recovery.

For illustration, to generate 1 MWh electricity, the electricity needed for compression is 0.6 MWh,
while 1.2 MWh of fuel is required for air heating and the turbine. Thus, the storage efficiency is
1 / (0.6 + 1.2) * 100 = 55%.

Input
Electricity, when the store is filled. Gas for air heating and turbine operation, when the store is emptied.

Output
Electricity and heat (optional, as is the case for SCGT or CCGT)

149
Typical capacities
There is no typical capacity. The two currently operating plants have generating capacities of 110 and
290 MW, but new plants can be both smaller and larger.

Regulation ability
A CAES plant will be able to generate at full capacity within 15 minutes from cold start.

Advantages/disadvantages
CAES is in addition to pumped hydro storage the only storage technology that currently is capable of
operating over 100 MW for several hours. The potential production period is at any time limited by the
actual filling level in storage.

CAES can be built in such a way that it also is possible to produce power by only using gas and no
compressed air. In this situation the plant will be similar to a single cycle gas turbine.

The CAES positive environmental profile is the ability to store wind generated power from the time of
generation to the time of consumption. On the negative side is that some energy is lost in this process
and that fuel is used in the generation process.

Research and development


World wide there have only been built two CAES plants so far. The CAES technology has potential for
being improved and optimized. A major EU research project is currently being carried out with the aim
of significantly improving the efficiency of future CAES power plants by using compression heat.

Examples of best available technology


The CAES plant in Huntorf near Bremen, Germany, is operated by E.ON Kraftwerke. It was built
in 1978 and has two caverns, each 155.000 m3, 72 bar storage pressure. Original power output 290
MW; revamped to 321 MW in 2007. Storage efficiency 42% (ref. 6).
The CAES plant in McIntosh, Alabama, USA operated by AEC (Alabama Electricity Corporation).
It was commissioned in 1991 and has a maximum power output of 110 MW. Storage efficiency
54% (ref. 6).

Special remarks
Currently, the energy storage technology receiving the most attention for use in large-scale energy
storage in U.S.A. is CAES, since the number of environmentally acceptable sites for future pumped
hydroelectric facilities is very limited (ref. 8).

CAES needs to have an underground storage and salt caverns are most suitable, but natural aquifer
structures and abandoned mines can also be used. This limits the location of CAES plants, there are
however numerous salt deposits in Denmark, along the North Sea coast and some in the Baltic Sea
coastal area.

150
The overall principle and energy balance of the newest plat in operation (McIntosh, USA) is shown
below:
117
Natural
Heat Heat gas
69
Electricity 100
Electricity
Air
Compressor Recuperator Burner Turbine

Cavern

The air, which is compressed, gets warm and needs be cooled. Similarly, the high pressure air from the
cavern is cooled, when the pressure is reduced, and therefore needs be heated before entering the
burner. No external heat is needed, since heat from compression is re-used. The overall energy
efficiency is 100 / (69 + 117) = 0.54.

Some of the generated electricity originates from natural gas. If this part is ignored, the storage
efficiency, defined as the share of the electricity input, which is regained, is about 0.43 (ref. 7). This
means that the 100 units of output electricity consist of 30 units from input electricity plus 70 units
from natural gas.

References
1. Huntorf CAES: More than 20 Years of Successful Operation, by Fritz Crotogino KBB GmbH,
Hannover, Germany and Klaus-Uwe Mohmeyer and Dr. Roland Scharf E.ON Kraftwerke
Bremen, Germany.
2. U.S. Department of Energy, Energy Efficiency and Renewable Energy: Renewable energy
Technology Characterizations, December 1997
3. ESA, Electricity Storage Association, www.electricitystorage.org
4. CAES development company, www.caes.net
5. EPRI-DOE Handbook of Energy Storage for Transmission and Distribution Applications,
EPRI, 2003
6. “30 years compressed air energy storage plant Huntorf – Experiences and outlook”,
presentation by P. Radgen, E.ON Energie, at the “Third International Renewable Energy
Storage Conference (IRES 2008)”, Berlin, November 2008.
7. “CAES – Compressed air electricity storage”, presentation by B. Elmegaard, Technical
University of Denmark, January 2009.
8. “Bottling Electricity: Storage as a strategic tool for managing variability and capacity concerns
in the modern grid”, Electricity Advisory Committee, December 2008,
http://www.oe.energy.gov/DocumentsandMedia/final-energy-storage_12-16-08.pdf

151
Data sheet

Technology Compressed Air Energy Storage (CAES)


2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit (MW) 100 - 350
Electricity efficiency (%) net 60 71 71 71 A 1
Time for warm start-up (hours) 0 0 0 0 2
Starting reliability (%) 99 99 99 99 3
Availability (%) 95 95 95 95 3
Technical lifetime (years) 30 30 30 30 2
Construction time (years) 3 3 3 3 2
Environment
NOX (kg per GJ fuel) < 0,006 < 0,002 < 0,002 < 0,002 B 4
CH4 (kg per GJ fuel) 0.0015 0.0015 0.0015 0.0015 4
N2O (kg per GJ fuel) 0.0022 4
Financial data
Investment storage, € per kWh storage 240 246 246 246 C+D 5
volume
Investment converter, € per kW output capacity 2000 1970 1970 1970 C+D 5

Fixed O&M (€/MW/year) < 14,000 < 14,000 < 14,000 < 14,000 C+E 3
Variable O&M (€/MW/year) - - F
Regulation ability
Fast reserve (MW per 15 minutes) 100% 100% 100% 100% 1

References:
1 “30 years compressed air energy storage plant Huntorf – Experiences and outlook”, presentation by P.
Radgen, E.ON Energie, at the “Third International Renewable Energy Storage Conference (IRES 2008)”,
2 KBB GmbH (a Schlumberger company),
3 EPRI-DOE Handbook of Energy Storage for Transmission and Distribution Applications, EPRI, 2003
4 It is estimated that emissions will be similar to Gasturbine single cycle so data is copied from technology
sheet no. 04.
5 “Economical and technical evaluation of energy storage systems”, presentation by J. Oberschmidt & M.
Klobasa, Fraunhofer Institut, at the “Third International Renewable Energy Storage Conference (IRES
2008)”, Berlin, November 2008.
Notes:
A The 2010 efficiency data is for the two plants in operation. Efficiency improvements are based on a concrete
case study.
B NOx emission today 25 ppm, 2010-15 < 9 ppm and 2020-30 < 1 ppm.
C No significant cost decrease is expected, since all equipments are established technologies.
D The two investment components shall be added, cf. paragraph 1.3 in the introductive chapter.
E Cost data are the same as in the 2005 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2002 to 2011 by
multiplying with a general inflation factor 1.2306
F Variable O&M costs depend mainly on power and gas consumption and the specific fuel costs.

152
52 BATTERIES

Brief technology description


There are several technologies available or being developed for storing electricity. Below is a
classification of a selection of these technologies regarding their capacities and discharge times.

Figure: Storage technology comparison by application (power level) and storage time
(ref. 3). UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply (e.g. backup for data centres to support the
Internet and communication centres).

The battery technology with the broadest base of applications today is the lithium-ion battery, used e.g.
in laptop computers and electric vehicles. The ability of lithium-ion batteries to economically serve
electric utility applications has not yet been demonstrated, except for some ancillary services provisions
to independent system operators (ref. 4).

Three main battery types are most relevant for large-scale electricity storage:
Advanced lead acid batteries
NaS (Sodium Sulphur) batteries
Flow batteries, in particular:
o Vanadium Redox (VRB)
o Zinc-bromine (ZnBr)

The lead-acid battery is one of the oldest and most developed battery technologies. A lead-acid battery
is an electrical storage device that uses a combination of lead plates or grids and an electrolyte

153
consisting of a diluted sulphuric acid to convert electrical energy into potential chemical energy and
back again.

The sodium sulphur (NaS) battery is a high-temperature (about 300 °C) battery system that consists of
a molten sulphur positive electrode and a molten sodium negative electrode separated by a solid
ceramic electrolyte. During discharge, positive sodium ions flow through the electrolyte and electrons
flow in the external circuit of the battery, producing about 2 V. This process is reversible (ref. 3).

Flow batteries utilize an active element in a liquid electrolyte that is pumped through a membrane
similar to a fuel cell to produce an electrical current. The system‟s power rating is determined by the
size and number of membranes, and the runtime (hours) is based on the volume of electrolyte pumped
through the membranes. Pumping in one direction produces power from the battery, and reversing the
flow charges the system.

The Vanadium redox battery (VRB) is based on vanadium as the only element, and is based on the
reduction and oxidation of the different ionic forms of Vanadium. Energy can be stored indefinitely in
a liquid – very low self-discharge.

The Zinc-bromine (ZnBr) battery is based on cells with two different electrolytes flowing past carbon-
plastic composite electrodes in two compartments separated by a microporous polyolefin membrane.

For batteries to be practically applied in the utility grid, reliable power conversion systems (PCSs) that
convert AC power to battery DC and back to AC are needed.

Typical capacities
See figure on previous page.

Input
Electricity

Output
Electricity.
Some of the electricity losses may be regained as useful heat. However, a heat pump may be necessary
to produce valuable heat.

Regulation ability
The potential benefits for electricity systems are:
Deferred or avoided substation upgrade
Energy cost savings, e.g. reduce peak energy generation/purchases or shift off-peak wind
generation to peak
Transmission and/or generation capacity reduction credit
Regulation control and black start

154
Advantages/disadvantages
Advantages of the Vanadium Redox (VRB) system is a high-energy efficiency of over 75% (AC to
AC) and over 85% (DC to DC); a very low self discharge; storage capacity can be increased by
increasing electrolyte volume (no change to battery cell-stacks); the lifetime charge-discharge cycle is
over 13,000 cycles without need for membrane replacement. The battery has a charge/discharge
window of 1 to 1.

The strengths of the NaS battery are also the high average DC energy efficiency (charging/
discharging) of 85%, its relative long-term durability of 15 years and assumed specification of 2,500
cycles, and a high energy density i.e. reduced space requirements.

Research and development


The basic principals behind the NaS battery were discovered in the 1960s by the Ford Motor Company.
NGK of Japan began research in NAS batteries in 1987, began testing of prototypes for commercial use
at the Tokyo Electric Power in 1992 and in Japan are currently 19 sites totalling 52 MW, mainly for
demonstration purposes. The major stakeholders are NGK (producer) and Tokyo Electricity Power
(alliance with NGK).

Early work on VRB was undertaken by NASA in the 1970s. Currently the major stakeholders and
developers are VRB Power Systems (Canada), Sumitomo Electric Industries (Japan) and Squirrel
Holdings (Thailand).

Examples of best available technology


VRB
PacifiCorp installation of 250 kW, 8 hours (2 MWh) battery completed in February 2004, which
also should be used for peak shaving.
Hydro Tasmania has a 200 kW, 4 hours (0.8 MWh) battery completed in November 2003, in
connection with wind turbines on Kings Island.
Tottori SANYO Electric Co. has a 1500 kW and 1500 kWh battery for Peak shaving.

NaS
The NaS battery technology for large-scale applications was perfected in Japan. There are 190
battery systems in service in Japan, totalling more than 270 MW of capacity with stored energy
suitable for six hours of daily peak shaving. The largest single NaS battery installation is a 34
MW, 245 MWh system for wind power stabilization in northern Japan (ref. 3).
American Electric Power is deploying a 5.0 MW NaS battery to solve a transmission issue in
southern Texas (ref. 4).

ZnBr
The Zinc-bromine battery is currently in use in the United States (ref. 4).

155
Special remarks
The figure below shows the investment costs of various technologies for electricity storage:

Figure: Energy storage technologies cost estimates. The CAES technology (cf. technology element 41)
also requires fuel costs for discharging, which are not captured in the figure. If the system operated on
compressed air alone, the costs per kilowatt (kW) would be approximately three times greater (ref. 4).

The RD&D in batteries has increased dramatically in recent years, primarily due to the huge political
focus and demand for electric vehicles. This development may yield a positive spin-off for large
stationary batteries, in terms of efficiencies, technical life and cost. Thus, the cost forecasts in the tables
below may be somewhat to the conservative side.

References

1. EPRI-DOE Handbook of Energy Storage for Transmission and Distribution Applications,


EPRI, 2003
2. Electricity Storage Association,
http://www.electricitystorage.org/tech/technologies_comparisons_ratings.htm
3. “Capturing Power Grid”, IEEE Power & Energy Magazine, July/August 2009,
http://www.electricitystorage.org/images/uploads/docs/captureGrid.pdf
4. “Bottling Electricity: Storage as a strategic tool for managing variability and capacity concerns
in the modern grid”, Electricity Advisory Committee, December 2008,
http://www.oe.energy.gov/DocumentsandMedia/final-energy-storage_12-16-08.pdf

156
Data sheets

The investment costs of the two selected batteries are stated in different terms:
The total investment of the NAS battery has been converted to specific cost in two different
ways, by dividing by the stored amount of energy (€/MWh) and by the generating capacity
(€/MW). This is due to lack of data for the NAS battery. The two alternative ways shall not be
added.
The investment of the VRB battery is separated into two components, which shall be added
(through the discharge time per cycle): 1) The equipment, which is primarily determined by the
amount of energy stored (i.e. the battery itself); and 2) The equipment, which determines how
much power the system can deliver (i.e. converter).
Cf. further explanation in paragraph 1.3.

Technology Sodium Sulphur (NaS)


2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Storage capacity (MWh) 100 100 100 2
Generating capacity for one battery (MW) 10 10 10 2
Charge-discharge ratio 2:1 A 2
Cell efficiency (%)
System efficiency (%), AC to AC, net 85% 3
Lifetime in full charge-discharge cycles 2500 2
Technical lifetime (years) 15 15 15 5
Construction time (months) 6-8 1
Financial data
Specific investment, storage capacity (k€/MWh) 210-940 136 136 D 7;4;4

or specific investment, output capacity (M€/MW) 1.8-2.6 1.7 1.7 D 4+5+6;4,4

Fixed O&M (€/MW/year) 51000 51000 51000 D 4


- do - 7100 D 5
Variable O&M (€/MWh) 5.3 5.3 5.3 B+D 4
- do - 16 C+D 5

References:
1 Commercial Deployment of the NaS Battery in Japan, by Hyogo Takami, Tokyo Electric Power Company and Toyoo
Takayama, NGK Insulators, Ltd.
2 Electric energy storage solution group, R&D center, engineering R&D division, Tokyo electric power company (e-mail)
3 NAS battery energy storage system for power quality support in Malaysia, Siam, Hyogo Takami, (TEPCO)
4 EPRI-DOE Handbook of Energy Storage for Transmission and Distribution Applications, EPRI, 2003.
5 "Economic valuation of energy storage for utility.scale applæications", Dan Mears, Technology Insigths (Canada) at
Workshop on Electricity Storage, Toronto, June 18 2008.
6 Information from NGK Insulators Ltd. (www.ngk.co.jp/english), Japan, to Danish Energy Authority, September 2008
7 Electricity Storage Association, California,
http://electricitystorage.org/tech/technologies_comparisons_capitalcost.htm
Notes:
A Number of hours it takes to charge the battery for having one hour to discharge the battery.
B Based on 2500 operating hours a year
C Assuming 1000 hours/year. If the battery is used for regulation control and black start, the variable O&M is only 3
D Cost data are the same as in the 2010 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2008 to 2011 by multiplying with a
general inflation factor 1.053

157
The number of charge-discharge cycles and thus the O&M costs strongly depend on how a battery is
applied, e.g. for deferring a substation upgrade, for energy cost savings (shift off-peak generation to
peak), transmission and generation capacity reduction, or regulation control and black start service. The
above table therefore gives two sets of O&M costs.

Technology Vanadium Redox (VRB)


2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Storage capacity (MWh)
Generating capacity for one unit (MW) 10 10 10 1
System efficiency (%), DC to DC, net 80 3
System efficiency (%), AC to AC, net 70 4
Lifetime in full charge-discharge cycles 13000 1
Construction time (months) 6-8 1
Financial data
Investment storage, k€ per MWh storage volume 70 51 51 51 C 4
Investment converter, M€ per MW output capacity 1.5 1.1 1.1 1.1 C 4
Fixed O&M (€/MW/year) 54,000 54,000 54,000 A 2
Variable O&M (€/MWh) 2.8 2.8 2.8 A;B 2

References:
1 VRB Power Systems Incorporated, an electrochemical Energy Storage Company, Executive Summary
2 EPRI-DOE Handbook of Energy Storage for Transmission and Distribution Applications, EPRI, 2003.
3 “Vanadium redox flow battery”, presentation by M. Schreiber, Cellstrom, at the “Third International
Renewable Energy Storage Conference (IRES 2008)”, Berlin, November 2008
4 “Economical and technical evaluation of energy storage systems”, presentation by J. Oberschmidt & M.
Klobasa, Fraunhofer Institut, at the “Third International Renewable Energy Storage Conference (IRES
2008)”, Berlin, November 2008
Notes:
A Cost data are the same as in the 2005 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2002 to 2011 by
multiplying with a general inflation factor 1.2306
B Based on 2500 operating hours a year
C A 27% cost decrease for the mature technology is expected (ref.2).

158
60 SEASONAL HEAT STORAGE

Brief technology description


This technology sheet addresses different options for long-term (seasonal) heat storage for district
heating systems.

Figure 1: Seasonal thermal energy storage – concepts (ref. 2).

A hot-water tank is similar to the water tanks used for short-term (diurnal) heat storage, only bigger.
They are used for solar heating systems in e.g. Germany, where the biggest tank is 12.000 m3 (ref. 2).

The water pit is the most commonly used technology in Denmark, since initial demonstrations showed
that this is the cheapest solution for large volumes (ref. 1 and 4). A water pit is essentially a hole in the
ground lined by a water-proof membrane, filled with water and covered by a floating and insulating lid.
The excavated earth may be used as a dam surrounding the hole, thus increasing the water depth.

When storing hot and/or cold water in natural underground aquifers, direct heat exchange is taking
place through vertical wells, typical one centre well and a number of peripheral wells. Several aquifer
stores are being operated together with heat pumps in Holland and Sweden, for space cooling during
summer and heating during winter. China has a long tradition of cold water storage in aquifers. The
chemical composition of the aquifer and natural groundwater flow may negatively influence the

159
performance. However, the flow can be managed by extra wells outside the storage area. Aquifer
storage is the cheapest technique for huge low-temperature volumes, when it can be mastered (ref. 3).

Tubes in boreholes (duct storage) used with heat pumps is common in several countries. A typical store
operates at low temperatures (0 to 30 °C). The storage efficiency can reach 90 to 100% when the store
is operating around the average natural temperature of the ground (ref. 3), and there is no strong natural
groundwater flow.

Using tubes in gravel and sand is a combination of the water pit and the borehole store. Using gravel
and sand as storage media increases the storage capacity (kWh/m3).

Input
Heat from any heat source, e.g. solar collectors.

Output
District heat.

The average heat loss depends on several parameters. A characteristic figure for the ratio of the heat
losses to the amount of stored energy is the surface/volume ratio of the store. A small store with a
volume of e.g. 20 m³ has a surface to volume ratio that is eight times the ratio of a store with 10,000
m³. Hence, the heat losses referred to the stored energy are eight times higher for the small store than
for the large one.

Another important issue is, whether a heat pump is used to cool the stored water. This will decrease the
annual heat losses substantially.

The heat losses from a pit store are larger during the first four years than afterwards, as the surrounding
soil needs be heated.

Research and development


Major challenges for water pits are:
Reliable and maintenance-free pits;
Lower costs;
Membranes, which can withstand 95 oC on a long term basis.

Examples of best available technologies


Water pits: Marstal (www.solarmarstal.dk), Dronninglund (www.planenergi.dk).
Gravel storage: Marstal (ref. 1)
Tanks: Hannover and Munich (www.solites.de)

Additional remarks
Heat stores are characterized by a considerable economy of scale:

160
Figure 2: Investment cost of seasonal heat stores in Germany (ref. 2). The strong cost degression with
increasing volume is obvious. GRP: Glass-fiber reinforced plastic. HDC: High-density concrete. ATES:
Aquifer Thermal Energy Storage. BTES: Borehole Thermal Energy Storage.

The most expensive part of a pit heat storage is the cover. Distribution of investment cost for a 60,000
m3 pit, which is being established 2009-10 in Dronninglund, Denmark (ref. 4):

€/m3
Excavation of earth 3.2
Membrane work 5.7
Cover 2.8
Cover membrane (roof foil) 6.0
Drainage system 0.27
Mineral wool 1.5
Manhole 0.13
Total direct costs 20
Other costs (heat exchanger, connecting
14
pipes, planning, administration etc.)
Overall cost 34

There is almost no economy-of-scale for store volumes above 50,000 m3. The marginal investment cost
for increasing the volume is about 20 €/m3 (ref. 4). Thus, the investment cost for 100,000 m3 store
would be approx. 27 €/m3.

The investment cost of a 5,700 m3 storage tank, established in Munich, Germany, 2006, was about 160
€/m3 (ref. 5).

161
Under Danish climatic conditions seasonal storage of solar heat typically requires 0.5-2 m3 store
volume per m2 solar collector, with solar heat contributing 20-40% of the total heat load (cf. technology
element ‟56 Solar district heating‟). For solar heat only systems, the store volume needs be about 4 m3
per m2.

References

1. “Seasonal heat storages in district heating networks”, Ellehauge & Kildemoes and Cowi, July
2007. A project (Preheat) funded by Intelligent Energy – Europe and the Danish systems
operator Energinet.dk.
2. Dirk Mangold: “Seasonal Heat Storage. Pilot projects and experiences in Germany”
(www.solites.de). Presentation at the PREHEAT Symposium at Intersolar 2007, Freiburg,
Germany, June 2007.
3. “Heat storage technologies”. Report, June 2007, from the PREHEAT project, funded by the
Intelligent Energy – Europe programme (www.preheat.org).
4. Planenergi (Danish company; www.planenergi.dk), which has been involved in most pit heat
stores in Denmark, and which is installing (2009-10) a 60,000 m3 pit store in Dronninglund,
Denmark.
5. “Technologies for thermal energy storage”, presentation by P. Schossig, Fraunhofer Institut,
Solare Energiesysteme, at the “Third International Renewable Energy Storage Conference
(IRES 2008)”, Berlin, November 2008.

162
Data sheet

Technology Seasonal heat storage in water pits


2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Store volume (m3) 60000
Storage capacity, kWh/m3 60-80 2
Efficiency, % 80-95 A 3
Construction time (years) 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 3
Technical lifetime (years) 20 20 20 20 B 3
Financial data
Specific investment costs (€ per m3) 35 35 34 30 C 1;3;3;3
Electricity consumption (MWh/year) 40 D 3
O&M (% of investment per year) 0.7 3

References:
1 “Seasonal heat storages in district heating networks”, Ellehauge & Kildemoes and Cowi, July 2007.
A project (Preheat) funded by Intelligent Energy – Europe and the Danish systems operator
Dirk Mangold: “Seasonal Heat Storage. Pilot projects and experiences in Germany”. Presentation at
2 Energinet.dk.
the PREHEAT Symposium at Intersolar 2007, Freiburg, Germany, June 2007.
3 Planenergi (Danish company; www.planenergi.dk), which in 2010 is installing a 60,000 m3 pit store
in Northern Jutland.
Notes:
A The storage loss depends on several parameters, such as store volume, insulation, whether a
heat pump is part of the system etc. The stated interval covers a large store, storage temperature
85-90 C, without (80%) and with (95%) a heatpump to discharge the store.
B The most critical part is the cover. The technical lifetime depends much on the water temperature.
The lifetime of the store may be extended by reinvesting in a new cover.
C 2010: Budget cost for a 60,000 m3 pit. The cost development assumes a 10-20% reduction from
2020 to 2050, caused by replication of pits, pipes, pumps, heat exchangers and control system. For
other store volumes, please refer to paragraph 'Additional remarks' above.
D Electricity for internal pumps etc. only. If a heat pump is used, the drive electricity shall be added.
E Cost data are the same as in the 2010 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2008 to 2011 by
multiplying with a general inflation factor 1.053

163
61 LARGE-SCALE HOT WATER TANKS

Brief technology description

Thermal storage options can be split into four physically different technologies:
1. Sensible stores, which use the heat capacity of the storage material – mainly water for its high
specific heat content per volume, low cost and non-toxic medium.
2. Latent stores, which make use of the storage material‟s latent heat during a solid/liquid phase
change at a constant temperature.
3. Sorption stores, which use the heat of ad- or absorption of a pair of materials such as zeolite-
water (adsorption) or water-lithium bromide (absorption).
4. Chemical stores, which use the heat stored in a reversible chemical reaction.

The market is dominated by hot water storage vessels due to the qualities, the cost, the simplicity and
the versatility of water as a storage medium.

Sensible stores may be constructed as steel, concrete or glass-fibre reinforced plastic tanks.

Steel tanks for hot water storage are a well established technology. Typically, a steel tank for district
heating applications is insulated with about 2x150 mm insulation (mineral wool), but for long-term
storage, such as solar heat, 3x150 mm may be better (ref. 6).

In recent decades steel tanks have been used as short-term storage in connection with combined heat
and power production and for almost all biomass heating plants in Denmark to control operation and to
reduce emissions.

Input
Hot water.

Output
Hot water.

Typical capacities
In Denmark, a combined heat and power plant typically operates at full capacity during the peak- and
high-load hours of the electricity market, about 75 hours a week. Still, the plants often have heat
storage capacity to cover the heat load for a full week during the cold season (ref. 5). The largest tanks
are above 50.000 m3.

For a biomass plant a typical capacity would be 10 – 12 hours full load at peak demand on a cold
Winter day (service time needed for small repairs) or 72 hours on Summer load to allow for weekend
stop and/or boiler inspection (ref. 6).

164
Optimal height/diameter relation (minimum heat loss and cheapest steel structure) for steel tanks (ref.
4):

0.90
0.80
0.70
Height / diameter

0.60
0.50
0.40
0.30
0.20
0.10
0.00
0 20000 40000 60000 80000 100000 120000

Volume (m3)

The energy content of heated water (in MJ per m3) is 4.187 times the temperature difference, so with a
temperature difference of 40 oC, the storage capacity is 167 MJ/m3. For illustration, to deliver a heat
output of 1 MJ/s for a full week, you need a tank of about 3000 m3.

Advantages/disadvantages
The most cost effective way of storing low (0 - 20ºC) to medium (20 - 100ºC) temperature heat is
water, because it is relatively cheap and convenient material. Furthermore water has, compared to other
common storage materials, a very high specific heat capacity as well as a very high volumetric heat
capacity, which is in particular important for compact storage systems.

The major challenges with water storage are that the tanks are difficult to insulate properly and that
they require substantial volume. Development to use chemical processes for heat storage is therefore
ongoing.

Additional remarks
The heat loss (in J/s) can be determined by:

where
k is the heat loss coefficient (J/s per oC and per m3),
Text is the temperature outside the store (oC),
Tst is the average inside temperature of the store (oC),
and V is the store volume (m3).

165
For a store insulated by 50 cm mineral wool, k is typically 0.16 J/s/oC/m3. Thus, a store of 10,000 m3
and an average temperature difference of 85 oC (e.g. 90 – 5 oC), looses 136 kJ/s. For a storage cycle of
one week, the total loss would be 82 GJ. If the store operates between 90 oC and 50 oC, the storage
capacity is 1675 GJ, and the loss therefore amounts to 5 % of the stored heat.

With an insulation of only 20 cm mineral wool k would be around 0.16 J/s/oC/m3.

Prices of Danish steel tanks used in district heating systems (ref. 1 and 4) and German tanks (ref. 2;
concrete tanks):

600

500

400
Price (€/m3)

300
Steel
200
Concrete

100

0
0 20000 40000 60000 80000 100000 120000

Volume (m3)

3 3
Figure 1: Price in €/m (2011 price level) as function of storage volume in m .

Recent prices for steel tanks used in small-medium Danish district heating systems are shown in Figure
2 (ref. 6):

250

200
Price (€/m3)

150

100

50

0
0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000
Volume (m3)

166
The cost breakdown for a 5700 m3 concrete hot water store built in Munich, Germany, in 2007 was
(ref. 2):

Ground work 12%


Static construction 38%
Stainless steel liner 20%
Insulation 14%
Charging/discharging device 8%
Connection to heating plant 5%
Others 3%

References

1. “Solar heat storages in district heating networks”, Ellehauge & Kildemoes and COWI, July
2007.
2. Dirk Mangold: “Seasonal Heat Storage. Pilot projects and experiences in Germany”
(www.solites.de). Presentation at the PREHEAT Symposium at Intersolar 2007, Freiburg,
Germany, June 2007.
3. ”Solvarme – status og strategi”. Energistyrelsen og Energinet.dk, maj 2007.
4. ”Sæsonvarmelagring i store ståltanke” (seasonal heat storage in large steel vessels), Test Station
for Solar Energy, Denmark, March, 1993.
5. ”Bedre integration af vind: Analyse af markedsdata for vindkraft, decentral kraftvarme m.m.”
(Improved integration of wind energy: Analysis of market data on wind power, combined heat
and power production etc.), Ea Energy Analyses, Copenhagen, September 2009.
6. Danish District Heating Association, January 2012.

167
Data sheet

Technology Large steel tanks for heat storage


2010 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Storage capacity, kWh/m3 60-80 1

Efficiency, % 95 A

Environment

Financial data
Specific investment costs 160-260 B 2
(€ per m3)
O&M

References:
1 Dirk Mangold: “Seasonal Heat Storage. Pilot projects and experiences in Germany”.
Presentation at the PREHEAT Symposium at Intersolar 2007, Freiburg, Germany, June
2007.
2 “Heat storage technologies”. Report, June 2007, from the PREHEAT project, funded by
the Intelligent Energy – Europe programme (www.preheat.org).
Notes:
A This is an example: A 10,000 m3 store operating between 90 and 50 C, an outdoor
temperature of 5 C, and a storage cycle of one week. Cf. description above under
'Additional remarks'.
B Store volume 10,000 m3.

168
62 SMALL-SCALE HOT WATER TANKS

Brief technology description

Hot water storage vessels in private homes are used for different purposes:
Domestic hot water; to ensure sufficient flow for high demands such as showers and filling bath
tubs. Basically a drum filled with water and equipped with a heating mechanism on the bottom
or inside.
Space heating; to function as „peak shavers‟ for district heating or solar heating.
Shift load storage to capture the cheaper, off-peak electricity and using it at other times,
effectively shifting portions of peak load to off-peak hours. Reshaping the load curve improves
the utility's capacity factor and, by extension, its financial health.

For solar domestic hot water, the heat exchanger from the solar collectors
is usually placed in the bottom of the store, cf. the lower coil in figure 1.
Often, an extra coil is placed in the top of the store to raise the temperature
by an additional heat source, when needed.

For shift load storage there is no need to have heat exchanger coils, if for
example the store is a component in a closed circuit with a heat pump.

In Denmark, hot water vessels are typically made in steel, corrosion


protected by enamel and anode. Other countries also use stainless steel,
which is generally found too costly in Denmark (ref. 1).

Figure 1: Typical domestic hot water store used for solar heating (ref. 1).

Input
Heat

Output
Hot water

Typical capacities
To store domestic hot water, the volume is often 100 - 150 litres for a single-family dwelling.

For solar water heaters, with no seasonal storage, the store volume needs be around 50-65 litres per m2
solar collector (ref. 1).

169
If a large volume is needed, the limit is often determined by the available space, e.g. in the laundry
room of the dwelling. A cupboard solution, 60 by 60 cm horizontal and 2+ metres high, has a water
volume of approx. 400 litres (ref. 5).

The energy content of heated water (in kJ per litre) is 4.187 times the temperature difference, so with a
temperature difference of 40 oC, the storage capacity is 167 kJ/litre. For illustration, to deliver a heat
output of 1 kJ/s for a full week, you need a tank of about 3000 litres.

Regulation ability
The Danish electricity transmission and systems operator Energinet.dk has funded a demonstration
project („From Wind Power to Heat Pumps‟, 2010-12) involving 300 homes with heat pumps to test
how these can be used to create dynamic demand, responding to electricity prices or serving the
electricity distribution companies in providing regulation power to the overall system. As part of the
project, Energinet.dk has analysed the potential for operating heat pumps with increased flexibility by
means of hot water stores (ref. 4).

Under Danish conditions, the potential benefit from full utilization of flexible electricity demand is
1.35 – 2.90 €cents/kWh. If an owner of a heat pump, with an annual electricity demand of 6000
kWh/year, received the entire benefit, this gives an annual saving of 80 – 140 €/year. However, a heat
pump has very little flexibility during the coldest months, when it is operated next to full load.
Therefore, moving electricity demand within 24 hours at anytime during the year will realistically yield
a benefit of less than 40 €/year (ref. 4).

A hot water store of 400 litres enables disconnecting a heat pump 1 – 2 hours during cold days, in
average up to 4 hours, without significantly compromising the indoor temperature. A cheap store, with
no heat exchanger, costs 540 – 670 € (ref. 5). Thus, the solution is not very attractive for home owners,
unless more of the societal benefits are transferred to the home owners through price mechanisms or
other incentives.

Advantages/disadvantages
Tanks are ideally suited for water storage since they are cheap and easy to produce (for
example, 50-1000 liter tanks are built by millions each year for the domestic and international market).

The major challenges with water stores are that they are difficult to insulate sufficiently, and that they
take much space. Therefore, developers are searching for feasible stores using chemical processes.

Environment
Electricity is produced and delivered more efficiently during off-peak hours than during on-peak
periods. The reduction in source fuel normally results in a reduction of greenhouse-gas emissions
produced by the power plant

Additional remarks
The heat loss coefficient for a 200 liters store insulated by 10 cm mineral wool is about 1.1 J/s per oC,
and about 2.0 J/s per oC, if the volume is 600 liters. The coefficients are twice as big, if the insulation is

170
only 5 cm. Thus, a 600 liters store, insulated by 10 cm mineral wool, and storing water at 40 oC above
an average room temperature of 20 oC looses 2.5 GJ/year.

The cost of a hot water store is almost a linear function of the volume (ref. 2). The figure below shows
the nominal prices of some hot water stores in Denmark, including heat exchanger coil and excluding
installation:

9.0
8.0
7.0
6.0
€/litre

5.0
4.0
3.0
2.0
1.0 Figure 2: Prices of hot water stores in
Denmark, 2011 (ref. 3).
0.0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600

litres

References

1. ”Solvarme – status og strategi” (Solar heat – status and strategy). Danish Energy Agency and
Energinet.dk, May 2007.
2. ”Forsyningskataloget” (Supply catalogue). Danish Energy Agency, 1988.
3. www.hedestoker.dk, September 2011.
4. ”Potentiale og muligheder for fleksibelt elforbrug med særligt fokus på individuelle
varmepumper”(Opportunities for flexible electricity demand using heat pumps in private
homes), Energinet.dk, January 2011.
5. Interview with mr. Mikael Byllemoes, Sydenergy, participant in Energinet.dk‟s project ‟From
Wind Power to Heat Pumps‟, September 2011.

171
71 UNDERGROUND STORAGE OF GAS

Brief technology description


Large volumes of gas may be stored in underground reservoirs or as liquefied gas in tanks (e.g. LNG -
liquefied natural gas). This technology element is about underground storage, of which there are three
principal types:

Depleted gas reservoirs are the most prominent and common form of underground storage. They are
the reservoir formations of natural gas fields that have produced all their economically recoverable gas.
The depleted reservoir formation is readily capable of holding injected natural gas. Using such a
facility is economically attractive because it allows the re-use, with suitable modification, of the
extraction and distribution infrastructure remaining from the productive life of the gas field which
reduces the start-up costs. Depleted reservoirs are also attractive because their geological and physical
characteristics have already been studied by geologists and petroleum engineers and are usually well
known. Consequently, depleted reservoirs are generally the cheapest and easiest to develop, operate,
and maintain of the three types of underground storage.

However, off-shore depleted gas fields are generally quite expensive.

Aquifer reservoirs are underground, porous and permeable rock formations that act as natural water
reservoirs. In some cases they can be used for natural gas storage. Usually these facilities are operated
on a single annual cycle as with depleted reservoirs. The geological and physical characteristics of
aquifer formation are not known ahead of time and a significant investment has to go into investigating
these and evaluating the aquifer‟s suitability for natural gas storage.

Salt caverns allow no gas to escape from storage. The walls of a salt cavern are strong and impervious
to gas over the lifespan of the storage facility. Once a suitable salt feature is discovered and found to be
suitable for the development of a gas storage facility a cavern is created within the salt feature. This is
done by the process of cavern leaching. Fresh water is pumped down a borehole into the salt. Some of
the salt is dissolved leaving a void and the water, now saline, is pumped back to the surface. The
process continues until the cavern is the desired size. Once created, a salt cavern offers an underground
natural gas storage vessel with very high deliverability. Cushion gas requirements are low, typically
about 33 percent of total gas capacity.

Input
Underground storage is primarily used for natural gas (almost pure methane, CH4), but other gasses
may also be stored underground.

That may include hydrogen (H2), but the surface facilities need be designed differently, as hydrogen is
much more explosive and also aggressive towards steel structures. The costs of storing hydrogen would
be larger, since the heating value per volume is about three times less (cf. Technology element 42).

172
If biogas (approx. 65 % CH4 and 35 % CO2) is to be stored underground, it would be instrumental to
remove the CO2 before storage. This is because stores are always wet, i.e. containing some water, and
CO2 in contact with water becomes acidic, posing potential problems for the surface facilities. Also, the
energy density will be increased, when the CO2 is removed.

Output
Same as input gas, but it will have to be cleaned before usage, e.g. water has to be removed.

Typical capacities
The characteristics of gas storage differ depending on the geological properties of the reservoir, which
in turn define their use (ref. 2):

Depleted field Aquifer Salt cavern


3
Working gas volume High High Relatively low
Cushion gas ~50 % ~80 % ~30 %
Injection rate* Low Low High
Withdrawal rate* Low Low High
*as compared to working gas volume

Working gas is the volume of gas that can be extracted during an operation of a facility.
Cushion gas (or base gas) is the share of residual gas that needs to be maintained to ensure appropriate
reservoir pressurization.

Using highly sophisticated technology, depths of up to 3,000 m are made accessible and cavern
diameters of 60 to 100 m, heights of several hundred meters, and geometrical volumes of 800,000 m³
and more can be realized today (ref. 1).

Regulation ability
The short-term regulation characteristics of an underground gas store are not relevant for the overall
gas system, as the gas transmission and distribution pipelines normally have substantial storage
capacity (so-called line pack). If, for example, a power plant wishes to start up from zero to full load in
a moment, the required gas volume is ready by the gate. The gas pressure in the pipeline will drop a
little, much within the operational limits, and the pressure will soon rebuild by drawing gas from other
parts of the system, incl. underground stores.

The primary regulation values of underground gas stores are as seasonal stores (gas production is fairly
constant, while summer demand is much lower than winter demand) and as back-up supply-security in
cases of emergency.

Examples of best available technology


The total gas storage capacity in Europe is around 67 billion m3. Of 125 storage facilities analyzed by
Gas Storage Europe, 64 % were depleted fields, 26 % salt caverns, 8 % aquifers and 2 % LNG peak
shaving (ref. 3).

3
A depleted field is often above 1 billion m3, an aquifer store from around 0.3 – 0.4 to above 1 billion m3, and salt caverns
about 35 – 100 million m3 per cavern. There are several caverns in one store.

173
Example, aquifer reservoir: Stenlille, Denmark. Gas is stored in porous water-saturated sandstone
approx. 1.5 km below surface. Total gas volume 1.5 billion m3, working gas 0.6 billion m3.

Example, salt caverns: Lille Torup, Denmark. Gas is stored in 7 caverns 1-1.7 km below ground. Each
cavern is 200-300 metres high and 40-60 metres in diameter. Total gas volume 0.7 billion m3, working
gas 0.44 billion m3. The store can extract 8 million m3/day and inject about half this flow.

References
1. Deep Underground Engineering (www.deep.de).
2. “Underground Natural Gas Storage: ensuring a secure and flexible gas supply”, presentation by
Jean-Marc Leroy, President of Gas Storage Europe (a sub-division of Gas Infrastructure
Europe; www.gie.eu.com ), January 2011.
3. Gas Storage Europe‟s “Investment Database”, February 2010
(www.gie.eu/maps_data/GSE/database/index.asp).

174
Data sheet

Cavern leaching
Plant for cavern leaching Mill. €
Total 9.9

Establishment of one cavern, 100 million Nm3 (approx. 1.1 TWh)


Mill. €
Construction and equipment 22
Cushion gas for one cavern (40% of total) 14
Total cost, 100 mio Nm3 active volume 36

Process equipment; injection 200,000 Nm3/hour (approx. 2200 MW),


withdrawal 600,000 nM3/hour (approx. 6600 MW)
Mill. €
Construction work 2.8
Compressors, incl. auxiliaries 30
Udtrækstog 13
Withdrawal equipment 4.5
Connections, transformer, regulation, and
instruments 13
Total investment cost 63

A new greenfield store, equivalent to Lille Torup in Denmark, would require


one leaching plant, 5 caverns, and one process plant.
Total investment cost 254 mill. €

Operation and maintenace, salt cavern, 400-500 million m3 working gas


Mill. € per year
Electricity 0.7 - 1.1
Gas consumption to reheat extracted gas 0.13
Total, incl. administration 6.5

175
72 HYDROGEN STORAGE

Brief technology description


Hydrogen serves as a storage and transportation medium for energy. In general there are five different
ways of storing hydrogen (ref. 1):
storage of pressurised gas
o in caverns
o in tanks e.g. for mobile applications up to 700 bar
o in pipelines between producers and consumers (like natural gas)
storage of liquid hydrogen
o liquefied at -253°C, stored in cryo-tanks
storage via absorption
o Metal hydride storage used in submarines commercially today, heavy
storage in chemical compounds, including SNG, ammonia and synthetic liquid hydrocarbons
(DME, Methanol)
storage via adsorption
o Adsorption at low temperatures on high surface area carbon and similar compounds,
under development.

Input
Hydrogen

Output
Hydrogen
The lower heating value of hydrogen is 10.79 MJ/Nm3 (0 oC and 1.015 bar) or 3.00 kWh/Nm3, while
the higher heating value is 12.75 MJ/Nm3. The density is 0.0899 kg/Nm3.

Typical plant capacities


Hydrogen storages can differ greatly in sizes from caverns of 100-100.000 GJ down to pressurised
tanks of 300 bar with capacities of 0.4-2.5 GJ (ref. 1)4.

Regulation ability
Production and storage of hydrogen is a tool to enhance regulation ability of the overall energy system,
without having to convert the electricity into low value energy like heat. How fast the hydrogen can be
converted into electricity and heat depends on the type and number of hydrogen converting fuel cells.

4
General Motors and QUANTUM Fuel System Systems Technology Worldwide has furthermore developed and tested a
700 bar hydrogen storage system which extends the range of a fuel cell vehicle by 60-70 percent compared to an equivalent-
sized 350 bar system. (4)

176
Environmental aspects
Hydrogen is, like electricity, an energy carrier, which is only as clean as the energy source from which
it is produced.

Some emissions of hydrogen will take place during storage, distribution and utilisation of the hydrogen.
Hydrogen emits to the stratosphere, where it connects with oxygen to form water. An increased amount
of water in the stratosphere will lead to further destruction of the ozone layer. It is however calculated
that the increase in water in the stratosphere due to hydrogen will be significantly less than the
increases, which are expected already to have appeared in the stratosphere during the last 50 years.
Therefore, it is uncertain whether future emissions of hydrogen may lead to further damages on the
ozone layer (ref. 2 + 3).

Research and development


Most research in hydrogen storage is directed towards storage in tanks for mobile applications, where
the challenge is to store hydrogen in tanks under high pressure or liquefied with low weight while
ensuring safety and energy amounts for ranges comparable to cars run on fossil fuels today.

Examples of best available technology


When it is necessary to store large amounts of hydrogen in a future energy economy then hydrogen can
be pumped into subterranean cavern storages. The method is already in use in UK (Tees Valley),
France and the USA (ConocoPhillips Clemens Terminal built a 2500 tonnes cavern store in Texas in
the 1980‟es, while Praxair established a hydrogen cavern store, also in Texas, more recently). Caverns
used for storage of natural gas could be used for the storage of hydrogen in the future.

References
1) http://www.hynet.info/hydrogen_e/index00.html
2) http://www.dmi.dk/dmi/brint_fra_brandselsceller_kan_maske_skade_ozonlaget
3) http://www.sciencemag.org/cgi/content/full/300/5626/1740

177
Data sheet

Technology Hydrogen storage, cavern


2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Output capacity, MW 2 1
Storage volume, MWh 10 1
Overall cycle efficiency, AC-AC (%) 35 A 1
Technical lifetime (year) 30 1
Financial data
Investment storage, € per kWh storage volume 11 A+B+C 1
Investment converter, € per kW output capacity 3000 A+B+C 1
Fixed O&M (€/MW/year)
Variable O&M (€/MWh)

References:
1 “Economical and technical evaluation of energy storage systems”, presentation by J. Oberschmidt &
M. Klobasa, Fraunhofer Institut, at the “Third International Renewable Energy Storage Conference
(IRES 2008)”, Berlin, November 2008
Notes:
A System: PEM electrolysis, storage of hydrogen at 30 bar, and a gas engine to convert back to AC.
B The two investment components shall be added, cf. paragraph 1.3 in the introductive chapter.
C Cost data are the same as in the 2010 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2008 to 2011 by
multiplying with a general inflation factor 1.053

178
80 ELECTROLYSIS

Brief technology description


Electrolysis is a process, where electricity is used to electrochemically reduce or oxidise a reactant into
fuel. The water decomposition via electrolysis takes place in two partial reactions at both electrodes,
which are separated by an ion-conducting electrolyte. At the negative electrode (cathode) hydrogen is
produced and on the positive electrode (anode) oxygen is produced. To keep the product gases
separated the two reaction compartments are separated. Depending on the type of electrolyser,
separation is either achieved by means of at solid electrolyte (SOEC, PEMEC) or a micro-porous
diaphragm (alkaline).

Several types of electrolysis exist (ref. 1+2):

Alkaline Electrolysis (AEC).


This process works with alkaline, aqueous electrolytes and has been used for hydrogen
generation since the end of the 18th century. Currently most commercially available
electrolysers are based on alkaline electrolysers. The anode compartment and cathode
compartment are separated by a micro-porous diaphragm to avoid blending of the product
gases. Operation temperature of 80 °C and op to 30 bar in pressure is industrial standard.
High-Temperature Electrolysis (Solid oxide electrolysis).
High-temperature electrolysis using a solid oxide electrolyser cell (SOEC) has been discussed
and tested as an interesting alternative. It is an advantage to apply part of the energy needed for
dissociation as high-temperature heat at around 800-1000°C into the process and then to be able
to run the electrolysis with reduced consumption of electric power. Furthermore, SOEC has the
possibility of electrolysing mixtures of steam and CO2 into a mixture of hydrogen and CO, so-
called syngas, from which artificial hydrocarbons may be produced.
Low Temperature Electrolysis (Polymer electrolyte electrolysis).
PEM electrolysis is based on a solid polymer electrolyte membrane electrolyser cell (PEMEC),
which operates at around 80°C like most conventional PEM fuel cells. The PEMEC is compact
and the low operating temperature enables fast start-up. The produced hydrogen is clean (no
traces of electrolyte) and can be delivered at pressures up to 16 bar (higher pressure systems are
under development). The PEMEC is well suited for decentralized hydrogen production with
local hydrogen storage facilities.

The conventional process is the alkaline electrolysis, which has been in commercial use for more than
100 years.

Input
Electricity and water

Output
Hydrogen and oxygen.

179
The lower heating value of hydrogen is 10.79 MJ/Nm3 (0 oC and 1.015 bar) or 3.00 kWh/Nm3, while
the higher heating value is 12.75 MJ/Nm3 or 3.54 kWh/Nm3. The density is 0.0899 kg/Nm3.

Typical plant capacities


Alkaline 4 kW-100 MW, PEM electrolysis 1-20 kW.

Regulation ability
Good dynamic performance is a feature of both alkaline electrolysis and PEM electrolysis, which
allows for fluctuating operation. Therefore they are suited for applications with fluctuating power
plants (primarily renewables like wind solar etc.). For high temperature electrolysis longer start up
times must be expected.

Advantages/disadvantages
Electrolysis can be performed in centralised or decentralised plants.
Decentralised production of hydrogen makes sense, when the hydrogen needs to be used
locally.
Electrolysis is not necessarily more efficient in large scale than in small scale.
With centralised production and utilisation, losses during distribution are avoided.

Environmental aspects
Hydrogen is, like electricity, an energy carrier, which is only as clean as the energy source from which
it is produced. Electrolysis can be used to enhance the value and thereby possibly the capacity of
surplus energy produced from fluctuating renewable energy sources such as wind.

Research and development


Efforts in hydrogen production are focused on small reformers (fuel to hydrogen), alkaline electrolysis,
SOEC electrolysis, PEM electrolysis, electrolysis by reversible fuels, and production of hydrogen-rich
liquid fuels.

In Denmark research is being made in the field of solid oxide electrolysis, PEM electrolysis and
alkaline electrolysis.

Special remarks
The energy balances are quite different for different technologies, as illustrated in the below two
figures, each with 100 energy units of electricity as input and based on the low heating value of
hydrogen.

The alkaline electrolysis generates surplus heat:

180
Water

58
100 Hydrogen
Alkaline
Electricity
electrolysis Recoverable
15 heat

Oxygen
Based on the high heating value, the hydrogen production would be 68.

The solid oxide electrolysis consumes heat:

Water

100
Electricity 98
Solid oxide
Hydrogen
electrolysis
Heat
20

Oxygen

The temperature of the heat source should be the same as the working temperature, i.e. 800 – 1000 oC.
Based on the high heating value, the hydrogen production would be 114.

The energy balance of the PEMEC is similar to that of the alkaline electrolysis, only difference being
about 70% hydrogen and 18% heat generated (ref. 2).

References
1) Topsoe Fuel Cell, October 2009.
2) IRD, November 2009.

181
Data sheets

Technology Electrolyser
AEC
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit (MW) < 3.4 1
Efficiency, electricity to hydrogen (%) 43-66 50-68 53-70 A 3
Electricity consumption (kWh/Nm3) 4.5-7.0 4.4-6.0 4.3-5.7 3
Useful heat out (kWh/Nm3) 0.78 B 1
Operating temperature (degr. C) 60-80 60-80 60-90 3
Technical lifetime (years) 20-30 25-30 30 3
Construction time (years)
Environment
Financial data
Specific investment (M€/MW) 1.4 1.0 C 2
Total O&M (% of investment per year) 4 4 4 4

References:
1 "Elektrolyse i Danmark" (Electrolysis in Denmark; in Danish). The Danish Partnership for Hydrogen
and Fuel Cells (www.hydrogennet.dk); August 2009
2 Danish Gas Technology Centre (DGC), January 2012.
3 Frauenhofer: Workshop præsentation: ”NOW-Studie Stand und entwiklungspotenzial der
wasserelektrolyse zur herstellung von Wasserstoff aus regenerativen Energien” Präsentation der
arbeitsergebnisse (Teil II) Tom Smolinka, Jürgen Garche. Frauenhofer-Institut für solare
Energisysteme ISE und FCBAT (Garche). NOW- Workshop, Kempinski, Berlin, May 2011.
4 "Electrolysis for Energy Storage & Grid Balance in West Denmark", Incoteco, 2004.
Notes:
A The stated efficiencies are for single cells. For complete multi-cell systems there may be a loss of 2-
20%. The efficiency is measured using the Low Heating Value of hydrogen. Multiply by 1.184 to convert
to High Heating Value.
B AEC generates surplus heat.
C The stated price is for a 485 m3/hour plant. Main equipment 2015 is 0.9 M€/MW.

182
Technology Electrolyser
SOEC
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit (MW) 5 5 1
Efficiency, electricity to hydrogen (%) 98 98 A 1
Electricity consumption (kWh/Nm3) 3.1 3.1 1
Heat demand (kWh/Nm3) -0.55 -0.55 B 1
Total energy efficiency (%) net 83 83 B 1
Operating temperature (degr. C) 850-1000 850-1000 2
Technical lifetime (years) 20 20 3
Construction time (years)
Environment
Financial data
Specific investment (M€/MW) 0.59 0.59 C+E 4
Total O&M (€/MW/year) 15000 15000 D+E 4

References:
1 "Elektrolyse i Danmark" (Electrolysis in Denmark; in Danish). The Danish Partnership for Hydrogen
and Fuel Cells (www.hydrogennet.dk); August 2009
2 Risø, 2003
3 ”Scenarier for samlet udnyttelse af brint som energibærer i Danmarks fremtidige energisystem”. RUC,
april 2001
4 Topsoe Fuel Cell, October 2009
Notes:
A The stated efficiencies are for single cells. For complete multi-cell systems there may be a loss of 2-
20%. The efficiency is measured using the Low Heating Value of hydrogen. Multiply by 1.184 to convert
to High Heating Value.
B SOEC consumes heat. Total energy efficiency equals (hydrogen plus heat out) divided by (electricity
plus heat in).
C Ref. 4 quotes a price of 750 USD/kW in 2025. This price is here used for both 2020 and 2030.
D O&M is 2.5% of initial investment per year.
E Cost data are the same as in the 2010 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2008 to 2011 by
multiplying with a general inflation factor 1.053

183
Technology Electrolyser
PEMEC
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit (MW) 0.045 A 1
Efficiency, electricity to hydrogen (%) 68 - 72 B 1
Electricity consumption (kWh/Nm3) 4.0 2
Useful heat out (+) or in (-) (kWh/Nm3) 0.72 2

Total energy efficiency (%) net 88 2


Operating temperature (degr. C) 60 - 80 100 - 200 1
Technical lifetime (hours) 4000 30000 2
Construction time (years)
Environment
Financial data
Specific investment (M€/MW) 6 1 2
Total O&M (€/MW/year)

References:
1 "Elektrolyse i Danmark" (Electrolysis in Denmark; in Danish). The Danish Partnership for
Hydrogen and Fuel Cells (www.hydrogennet.dk); August 2009
2 IRD, November 2009.
Notes:
A Largest demonstrated stack size.
B The stated efficiency is for single cells. For comlete multi-cell systems there may be a loss of
2-20%. The efficiency is measured using the Low Heating Value of hydrogen. Multiply by 1.184
to convert to High Heating Value.
C Cost data are the same as in the 2010 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2008 to
2011 by multiplying with a general inflation factor 1.053

184
81 CENTRALISED BIOGAS PLANTS

Brief technology description


Animal manure from a number of farms and organic waste from food processing and other industries
are transported to a plant. The biomass is either transported by road or pumped in pipes. At the plant,
the biomass is treated in an anaerobic process, which generates biogas. The biogas is converted into
heat and power in a CHP plant. The CHP plant can either be located at the biogas plant, or it can be an
external plant to where the gas is piped.

The biomass is received and stored in pre-storage tanks. Danish plants use continuous digestion in fully
agitated digesters. This implies removing a quantity of digested biomass from the digesters and
replacing it with a corresponding quantity of fresh biomass, typically several times a day. The digesters
are heated to either 35 - 40 oC (mesophilic digestion) or 50 - 55 oC (thermophilic digestion).

This technology sheet does not include single-farm biogas digesters, biogas from wastewater treatment
plants and landfill sites.

Input
Bio-degradable organic waste without environmentally harmful components. Typically, animal manure
(80 - 90 %) and organic waste from industry (10 - 20 %). Sludge from sewage treatment plants and the
organic fraction of household waste may also be used.

Rules for using animal products have been tightened by EU Directive 1774/2002 of 3 October 2002,
amended by Directive 808/2003 of 12 May 2003.

Output
Biogas containing 60-70% methane (CH4), 30-40% carbon dioxide (CO2) and < 500 ppm H2S (after
gas cleaning).

Methane has a lower heating value 35.9 MJ/Nm3. Biogas with 65% methane thus has a heating value of
23.3 MJ/Nm3.

For biogas plants based on energy crops, the methane content may be as low as 50% (ref. 3).

The data presented in this technology sheet assume that the biogas is used as fuel in an engine, which
produces electricity and heat, or sold to a third party. However, the gas may also be injected into the
natural gas grid or used as fuel for vehicles, cf. Technology sheet no. 82 on biogas upgrading.

The digested biomass is used as fertiliser in crop production.

185
The output of biogas depends much on the amount and quality of supplied organic waste. For manure
the gas output typically is 14 – 14.5 m3 methane per tonne, while the gas output typically is 30 – 130
m3 methane per tonne for industrial waste.

Typical capacities
There are about 20 centralised biogas plants in operation in Denmark. The average daily input is 50 –
600 tonnes raw material, typically delivered by 10 – 100 farms. The average daily yield is 1,000 –
25,000 Nm3 biogas, which can be converted to 0.1 – 3 MW electricity. Due to economy-of-scale, the
trend is towards larger plants.

Regulation ability
A typical biogas plant can regulate the production approximately +/- 15% within a day by adjusting the
feed pumps (ref. 2). Also, a typical plant has a gas store of approximately a half day‟s production.
Thus, gas supply can normally match demand variations within the day.

Biogas production may be increased during winter, when the energy demand is high, by adding organic
materials with high methane potential, e.g. silage from energy crops, glycerol (residue from production
of biodiesel), solid manure or garden waste. However, there is a biological limit to how fast the
production can be regulated. A biogas plant digesting only animal slurry during summer, may thus
increase the gas yield from 14-14.5 m3 methane per tonne to about 45-50 m3 methane per tonne during
a period of 3 to 4 weeks (ref. 2).

The additional income from gas sales may not balance the extra costs of storing feedstock and digested
biomass. Also, the emission of greenhouse gasses may increase (ref. 4).

Environment
The biogas is a CO2-neutral fuel. Also, without biogas fermentation significant amounts of the
greenhouse gas methane will be emitted to the atmosphere. For biogas plants in Denmark the CO2
mitigation cost has been determined to approx. 5 € per tonne CO2-equivalent (ref. 1).

The anaerobic treated organic waste product is almost odour free compared to raw organic waste.

Advantages/disadvantages
The CO2 abatement cost is quite low, since methane emission is mitigated.
Saved expenses in manure handling and storage; provided separation is included and externalities
are monetised.
Environmentally critical nutrients, primarily nitrogen and phosphorus, can be redistributed from
overloaded farmlands to other areas.
The fertilizer value of the digested biomass is better than the raw materials. The fertilizer value is
also better known, and it is therefore easier to distribute the right amounts on the farmlands.
Compared with other forms of waste handling, biogas digestion of solid biomass has the advantage
of recycling nutrients to the farmland – in an economically and environmentally sound way.

186
Research and development
Lack of sufficient organic industrial wastes can become a barrier as more centralised biogas plants are
established. Therefore, the main objective of the Danish biogas R&D activities (ref. 5) is to improve
the plants to become economically attractive either digesting only manure or by adding less attractive
organic wastes with more secure supplies in the long term.

References

1. Danish Climate Strategy, Ministry of Environment, February 2003.


2. Danish Energy Agency, 2009.
3. Danish Gas Technology Centre, 2009.
4. “Øget produktion og anvendelse af biogas i Danmark” (Increased production and use of biogas
in Denmark; in Danish), Danish Gas Technology Centre, 2009.
5. “Forsknings- og udviklingsstrategi for biogas” (Research and development strategy for biogas;
in Danish), Danish Energy Agency, Energy Technology Development Programme (EUDP) and
Energinet.dk, August 2009.

187
Data sheets

Data are given for four plant sizes: 300, 550, 800, and 1000 tonnes input per day.
The first three plants digest a mixture of animal slurry and industrial organic waste, while the latter
digests only animal waste and maize silage.
Another difference is that the first three plants have their own combined-heat-and-power plants, while
the latter supplies the gas to a third party.

Technology Centralised Biogas Plant with CHP


2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Daily input of manure & organic waste in tonnes 300 1
Biogas output Nm3/m3 raw material 30 - 40 28 - 35 28 - 35 C 7
Electricity efficiency (%) net 40 - 45 43 - 48 45 - 50 E
Electricity generating capacity (MW) 1.5 1.4 1.5 F
Heat generation capacity (MJ/s) 1.7 1.4 1.4 E
Availability (%) 98 4
Technical lifetime (years) 20 2
Construction time (years) 1 2
Own electricity consumption, kWh per ton biomass 6 1
Own heat consumption, kWh per m3 of raw material 34 5
Environment, biogas plant including co-generation
SO2 (g per GJ fuel) 19.2 19.2 19.2 19.2 8;3;3;3
SO2 (degree of desulphurisation, %) 0 0 0 0 3
NOX (g per GJ fuel) 540 540 540 540 8;3;3;3
CH4 (g per GJ fuel) 323 323 323 323 8;3;3;3
N2O (g per GJ fuel) 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 8;3;3;3
Financial data
Total plant investment, excl. transport equipment and co- 5.5 5.2 5.2 A+B;D 7
generation plant (M€)
Total investment, co-generation plant (M€) 0.25 0.25 0.25 D 1
Specific investment, incl. co-generation plant (M€/MW) 5.8 5.4 5.4 D
Total O&M (€/tonnes supplied raw material), excl. transport 3.1 3.1 3.1 D 7
Total O&M (€/MWh) 35 35 35 D

References:
1 Samfundsøkonomiske analyser af biogasfællesanlæg 2002. Fødevareøkonomisk Institut. Rapport 136
2 "Teknologidata for vedvarende energianlæg, Del 2, Biomasseteknologier. Danish Energy Agency, 1996.
3 Danish Energy Agency, 2009.
4 Lemvig Biogas Plant
5 Ramboll estimates based on monthly biogas data from Danish Energy Agency
6 Varme Ståbi
7 Danish Energy Agency, 2003.
8 National Environmental Research Institute, Denmark, 2009 (data from 2007).
Notes:
A Transport is typically 1.6-2.4 €/tonne; average distance between farms and plant 4-8 km.
B The deceasing investment costs presume an escalated market
C The output figures are estimated avarages for Danish conditions, recognizing the limited availability of industrial wastes
D Cost data are the same as in the 2005 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2002 to 2011 by multiplying with a
general inflation factor 1.2306
E Assumed same efficiencies as Technology element '06 Gas engines'
F Assumed that 10% of the gas is used for process heating, and that the engine operates 6500 hours/year.

188
Technology Centralised Biogas Plant with CHP
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Daily input of manure & organic waste in tonnes 550 1
Biogas output Nm3/m3 raw material 28 - 35 25 - 30 25 - 30 C 7
Electricity efficiency (%) net 40 - 45 43 - 48 45 - 50 E
Electricity generating capacity (MW) 2.4 2.3 2.3 F
Heat generation capacity (MJ/s) 2.8 2.3 2.2 E
Availability (%) 98 4
Technical lifetime (years) 20 2
Construction time (years) 1 2
Own electricity consumption, kWh per ton biomass 5 1
Own heat consumption, kWh per m3 of raw material 34 5
Environment, biogas plant including co-generation
SO2 (g per GJ fuel) 19.2 19.2 19.2 19.2 8;3;3;3
SO2 (degree of desulphurisation, %) 0 0 0 0 3
NOX (g per GJ fuel) 540 540 540 540 8;3;3;3
CH4 (g per GJ fuel) 323 323 323 323 8;3;3;3
N2O (g per GJ fuel) 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 8;3;3;3
Financial data
Total plant investment, excl. transport equipment and co- 7.8 7.4 7.4 A+B;D 7
generation plant (M€)
Total investment, co-generation plant (M€) 0.41 0.41 0.41 D 1
Specific investment, incl. co-generation plant (M€/MW) 4.1 3.8 3.8 D
Total O&M (€/tonnes supplied raw material), excl. transport 2.5 2.5 2.5 D 7
Total O&M (€/MWh) 31 31 31 D

References:
1 Samfundsøkonomiske analyser af biogasfællesanlæg 2002. Fødevareøkonomisk Institut. Rapport 136
2 "Teknologidata for vedvarende energianlæg, Del 2, Biomasseteknologier. Danish Energy Agency, 1996.
3 Danish Energy Agency, 2009.
4 Lemvig Biogas Plant
5 Ramboll estimates based on monthly biogas data from Danish Energy Agency
6 Varme Ståbi
7 Danish Energy Agency, 2003.
8 National Environmental Research Institute, Denmark, 2009 (data from 2007).
Notes:
A Transport is typically 1.6-2.4 €/tonne; average distance between farms and plant 4-8 km.
B The deceasing investment costs presume an escalated market
C The output figures are estimated avarages for Danish conditions, recognizing the limited availability of industrial wastes
D Cost data are the same as in the 2005 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2002 to 2011 by multiplying with a
general inflation factor 1.2306
E Assumed same efficiencies as Technology element '06 Gas engines'
F Assumed that 10% of the gas is used for process heating, and that the engine operates 6500 hours/year.

189
Technology Centralised Biogas Plant with CHP
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Daily input of manure & organic waste in tonnes 800 1
Biogas output Nm3/m3 raw material 25 - 30 24 - 28 24 - 28 C 2
Electricity efficiency (%) net 40 - 45 43 - 48 45 - 50 E
Electricity generating capacity (MW) 3.0 3.1 3.2 F
Heat generation capacity (MJ/s) 3.6 3.2 3.0 E
Availability (%) 98 4
Technical lifetime (years) 20 2
Construction time (years) 1 2
Own electricity consumption, kWh per ton biomass 4 1
Own heat consumption, kWh per m3 of raw material 34 5
Environment, biogas plant including co-generation
SO2 (g per GJ fuel) 19.2 19.2 19.2 19.2 8;3;3;3
SO2 (degree of desulphurisation, %) 0 0 0 0 3
NOX (g per GJ fuel) 540 540 540 540 8;3;3;3
CH4 (g per GJ fuel) 323 323 323 323 8;3;3;3
N2O (g per GJ fuel) 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 8;3;3;3
Financial data
Total plant investment, excl. transport equipment and co- 9.5 9.0 9.0 A+B;D 7
generation plant (M€)
Total investment, co-generation plant (M€) 0.49 0.49 0.49 D 1
Specific investment, incl. co-generation plant (M€/MW) 3.4 3.2 3.2 D
Total O&M (€/tonnes supplied raw material), excl. transport 2.2 2.2 2.2 D 7
Total O&M (€/MWh) 31 31 31 D

References:
1 Samfundsøkonomiske analyser af biogasfællesanlæg 2002. Fødevareøkonomisk Institut. Rapport 136
2 "Teknologidata for vedvarende energianlæg, Del 2, Biomasseteknologier. Danish Energy Agency, 1996.
3 Danish Energy Agency, 2009.
4 Lemvig Biogas Plant
5 Ramboll estimates based on monthly biogas data from Danish Energy Agency
6 Varme Ståbi
7 Danish Energy Agency, 2003.
8 National Environmental Research Institute, Denmark, 2009 (data from 2007).
Notes:
A Transport is typically 1.6-2.4 €/tonne; average distance between farms and plant 4-8 km.
B The deceasing investment costs presume an escalated market
C The output figures are estimated avarages for Danish conditions, recognizing the limited availability of industrial wastes
D Cost data are the same as in the 2005 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2002 to 2011 by multiplying with a
general inflation factor 1.2306
E Assumed same efficiencies as Technology element '06 Gas engines'
F Assumed that 10% of the gas is used for process heating, and that the engine operates 6500 hours/year.

190
Technology Centralised Biogas Plant without CHP
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Daily input of manure & organic waste in tonnes 1000
Capacity factor (full load operation), hours/year 8760 1
Methane output, Nm3 per tonne raw material 19.7 A 1
Gas production, MWh/year 71500 1
Gas flaring, MWh/year 700 1
Gas delivery, MWh/year 70800 1
Process heat demand, MWh/year 6800 B 1
Own electricity consumption, MWh/year 2000 1
Technical lifetime (years) 20 1
Construction time (years) 1 1
Environment
SO2 (degree of desulphurisation, %)
NOX (g per GJ fuel)
CH4 (g per GJ fuel)
N2O (g per GJ fuel)
Financial data
Biogas plant, M€ 15 C 1
Vehicles for biomass transport, M€ 2.0 C 1
Gas pipeline (16 km), M€ 1.9 C 1
Total investment, M€ 18 C 1
Total investment, € per tonne raw material 50 C 1
Operation (€/tonne supplied raw material), excl. transport 4.9 C 1
Maintenance (€/tonne supplied raw material), excl. 0.78 C 1
O&M, biomass transport (€/tonne)
transport 2.7 C 1

References:
1 Danish Energy Agency, 2009
2 Eltra PSO project 3141: "Kortlægning af emissionsfaktorer fra decentral kraftvarme", 2003
Notes:
A 92% animal slurry + 8% solid biomass (animal dung, slurry fibre, maize silage). Average dry matter content
B Process heat supplied from external source.
C Cost data are the same as in the 2010 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2008 to 2011 by multiplying
with a general inflation factor 1.053

191
82 UPGRADED BIOGAS

Brief technology description


Biogas can be upgraded for injection in natural gas grids or for use as vehicle fuel.

The gas is usually cleaned before upgrading. Cleaning removes water moisture, particles, hydrogen
sulphide, and ammonia. Upgrading removes CO2. It is rather expensive to remove nitrogen, so this is
seldom done.

The two dominating upgrading technologies are the water scrubber technology and the Pressure Swing
Adsorption (PSA) technology.

In the water scrubber the biogas is contacted with water (either by spray or bubbling through) to wash
out CO2 but also hydrogen sulphide, since these gases are more soluble in water than methane. The
absorption process is purely physical.

The PSA (also called the molecular sieve) separates some gas components from a mixture of gases
under high pressure according to the components' molecular characteristics and affinity for an
adsorbent material (e.g. active carbon). The process then swings to low pressure to desorb the
adsorbent material.

Other technologies are:


A. Chemical absorption in amines, like mono ethanol amine (MEA). This process has promises of
producing the best quality product gas, having the lowest methane loss and the smallest
electricity consumption, although a higher demand for process heat (ref. 4).
B. Scrubbing by polyethylene glycol (registered trademarks Selexol and Genosorb). This is similar
to water scrubbing, the major difference being that CO2 and H2S are more soluble in glycol than
in water. Glycol scrubbing is always designed with recirculation.
C. Cryolithic separation; being developed. The process will produce liquid CO2, which is easier to
use or handle than gaseous CO2.
D. Membrane separation

Input
Biogas from an anaerobic digester typically contains 50-70% methane (CH4) and 30-50% CO2. In
addition there are some contaminants: Hydrogen sulphide (H2S), ammonia (NH3) and various trace
components.

The main contaminants, that can have an impact on distribution grids, are moisture, H2S, CO2, and O2.
O2 is not found in raw digester biogas, but some O2 may be introduced during sulphur removal.
Otherwise, O2 is a substantial component of landfill gas.

Output
A gas with a high and constant heating value and few contaminants.

192
The Wobbe index (W), which characterises the energy content of a gas passing through a nozzle at a
certain pressure, is defined by the equation

where H is the heating value (MJ/Nm3) and d is the relative density of the gas (density of gas divided
by density of air). W equals 53.5 MJ/Nm3 for pure methane and 27.3 MJ/Nm3 for biogas (65% CH4
plus 35% CO2). The Wobbe index requirement for the Danish gas distribution systems is 50.8 – 55.9
MJ/Nm3.

Current upgrading technologies produce gas qualities, which are acceptable from a technical point-of-
view, but are a challenge from an accounting point-of-view in a Danish gas system supplied with North
Sea natural gas, which has a relatively high heating value. It is possible to add propane to obtain the
same heating value as natural gas and thereby solve the commercial challenge. This costs about 0.03 €
per m3 upgraded gas (ref. 3). When the gas is to be injected into a natural gas system, a pressure of 4
bars is usually sufficient.

There is no technical European standard for biogas injection into natural gas grids, although Marcogaz
(www.marcogaz.org), the technical association of the European natural gas industry, has developed a
draft recommendation. Also, a working group under CEN is developing (2009) a standard for injection
of non-conventional gases into natural gas grids, and in December 2011 the European Commission
established a working group to define a common standard.

Some EU countries (France, Germany, Holland, Sweden, and Switzerland) have adopted their own
regulations. These standards are mostly based on natural gas standards, with amendments concerning
biogas properties (ref. 2).

If used as vehicle fuel, the upgraded gas needs be pressurized to about 200 bars. The gas can be used in
the same vehicles that use natural gas. Worldwide, there are more than 5 million gas vehicles, and more
than 50 manufacturers offer a range of 250 models of commuter, light and heavy duty vehicles (ref. 5).
The gas may also be condensed to liquid gas (below 162 oC), which contains three times more energy
per volume than compressed gas.

Environment
Some technologies have substantial methane losses. Suppliers of water scrubbers and PSA‟s typically
claim a maximum of 2 % methane loss, but in some cases higher losses have been measured (ref. 1).
However, additional equipment is delivered as part of the standard package to remove most of this
methane. Using catalytic oxidation, the emission is reduced to below 0.2 % (ref. 3).

When upgraded biogas is used as vehicle fuel, emissions of particles, soot, NOx and non-methane
hydrocarbons are drastically reduced, compared with gasoline and diesel (ref. 5).

193
Research and development
Currently, there is much focus on the further development of chemical absorption in amines and
polyethylene glycol for carbon capture and storage (CCS) from large-scale power plants. This may
have positive consequences for smaller systems as well.

Additional remarks
The economy of scale is insignificant for capacities above 1000 m3/hour:

Figure 1: Capital costs in Eurocents per kWh product gas for various upgrading
technologies as a function of plant scale in Nm3/hour. The figure is based on
experiences from Germany, where much biogas is produced from energy crops.
The assumed methane content is 53% (ref. 4).

Investment costs depend on the inlet volume flow rather than the output flow. Costs for upgrading
biogas with higher methane contents than 53% is therefore lower per m3 outlet gas than shown in
Figure 1.

References

1. ”Utvärdering av uppgraderingstekniker för biogas” (assessment of biogas upgrading


technologies; in Swedish), Margareta Persson, Svenskt Gastekniskt Center (SGC), November
2003.
2. ”Regulation draft of biogas commercialisation in gas grid”, a project funded by the European
Commission (the Altener programme). Final report June 2005. Reports available at
http://www.icaen.net/uploads/bloc1/ambits_actuacio/Biocomm/INDEX.HTML#12
3. Danish Gas Technology Centre, interview 2009.
4. “Technologien und Kosten der Biogasaufbereitung und Einspeisung in das Erdgasnetz.
Ergebnisse der Markterhebung 2007-2008”. Urban, Wolfgang et al, Fraunhofer Institut
Umwelt-, Sicherheits-, Energietechnik, 2008.

194
5. ”Biogas upgrading to vehicle fuel standards and grid injection”, International Energy Agency,
December 2006.
6. “Biogas upgrading and utilization”, International Energy Agency, undated.

195
Data sheets

Data are shown for two different capacities, 200 and 1000 Nm3 upgraded gas per hour:

Technology Upgraded biogas


Water scrubber and pressure swing adsorption
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity (Nm3/hour) 200
Methane content of raw gas 65
Electricity consumption (% of upgraded gas)
Compression for vehicle use (200 bar) 3-6 A 1
Injection into natural gas grid (4-7 bar) 0 B 2
Availability (%) 95 1
Technical lifetime (years) 15 2
Construction time (years) 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 C 2
Environment
Methane emission, % 0.1-0.2 D 2
Financial data
Specific investment costs (€ per Nm3/h raw gas) 3500 3300 2900 2800 D;E+H 1;2;2;2

O&M (€ per Nm3 raw gas) 0.03-0.05 0.03-0.05 0.03-0.05 0.03-0.05 F;G+H 2

References:
1 ”Utvärdering av uppgraderingstekniker för biogas” (assessment of biogas upgrading technologies; in Swedish), Margareta
Persson, Svenskt Gastekniskt Center (SGC), November 2003.
2 Danish Gas Technology Centre, 2009.
Notes:
A Some of the used electricity can be regained as process heat.
B Compression to about 4-8 bar is part of the upgrading process itself, and electricity consumption is thus part of O&M
C costs.
Upgrading plants are often delivered off-the-shelf as plug-in containers.
D Some processes release significant amounts of methane, but additional equipment (part of a standard delivery) will then
oxidize most of the methane.
E Only a modest cost decrease is expected (20% by 2050), since current technologies are established technologies.
However, since assembling requires much manual labour, production outside OECD countries may decrease the cost.
F O&M cost may decrease with increased market volumes and may increase with increasing electricity prices. Therefore, no
development in O&M cost is expected.
G Assuming 7500 equivalent full-load operational hours per year.
H Cost data are the same as in the 2010 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2008 to 2011 by multiplying with a
general inflation factor 1.053

196
Technology Upgraded biogas
Water scrubber and pressure swing adsorption
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity (Nm3/hour) 1000
Methane content of raw gas 65
Electricity consumption (% of upgraded gas)
Compression for vehicle use (200 bar) 3-6 A 1
Injection into natural gas grid (4-7 bar) 0 B 2
Availability (%) 95 1
Technical lifetime (years) 15 2
Construction time (years) 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 C 2
Environment
Methane emission, % 0.1-0.2 D;E 2
Financial data
Specific investment costs (€ per Nm3/h raw gas) 2000 1900 1700 1600 D;E+H 1;2;2;2

O&M (€ per Nm3 raw gas) 0.03-0.05 0.03-0.05 0.03-0.05 0.03-0.05 F;G+H 2

References:
1 ”Utvärdering av uppgraderingstekniker för biogas” (assessment of biogas upgrading technologies; in Swedish),
Margareta Persson, Svenskt Gastekniskt Center (SGC), November 2003.
2 Danish Gas Technology Centre, 2009.
Notes:
A Some of the used electricity can be regained as process heat.
B Compression to about 4-8 bar is part of the upgrading process itself, and electricity consumption is thus part of O&M
C costs.
Upgrading plants are often delivered off-the-shelf as plug-in containers.
D Some processes release significant amounts of methane, but additional equipment (part of a standard delivery) will
then oxidize most of the methane.
E Only a modest cost decrease is expected (20% by 2050), since current technologies are established technologies.
However, since assembling requires much manual labour, production outside OECD countries may decrease the cost.
F O&M cost may decrease with increased market volumes and may increase with increasing electricity prices. Therefore,
no development in O&M cost is expected.
G Assuming 7500 equivalent full-load operational hours per year.
H Cost data are the same as in the 2010 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2008 to 2011 by multiplying with a
general inflation factor 1.053

197
83 BIOMASS GASIFIER, PRE-GASIFIER TO BOILERS

Brief technology description


A gasifier produces a combustible synthetic gas (syngas) from a fuel. In a low-temperature gasifier, it is
easy to use high alkaline containing fuels, as the gasifier operates below the melting point of those.
This encompasses low grade biomass, such as agricultural residues, energy crops and certain waste
fractions.

A simple application is co-firing biomass and coal in power plants. By using a biomass gasifier, the bio
ash is separated, instead of being mixed with coal ash, thus keeping the nutrients in a usable form, and
allowing the coal ash to be used for cement production. Furthermore, the syngas, comprising tar and
fine dust, may be combusted directly in the boiler, without expensive gas treatment.

Please note that the description of this technology may not be fully representative of its generic
characteristics, as all information originates from a single equipment supplier, the Danish company
DONG Energy, who markets its product under the trade name Pyroneer5.

The Pyroneer gasifier typically consists of three main components; a pyrolysis chamber, a char reactor
and a recirculating cyclone. Cleaning the gas may simply be done with a second cyclone.

Fuel enters the pyrolysis chamber, where the fuel particles are pyrolysed at approximately 650°C upon
contact with sand and ash particles. The pyrolysis chamber is a Circulating Fluid Bed gasifier. The low
pyrolysis temperature and residence time results in the formation of only light tars.

The residual char and the pyrolysis gases are blown upwards to the 1st cyclone. This cyclone separates
the sand and char particles to a char reactor, where the char is gasified. The gases generated in the char
reactor is recycled to the pyrolysis chamber. The gases leaving the first cyclone continue to the 2nd
cyclone. This cyclone is more efficient than the 1st cyclone and therefore most of the finest ash
particles are separated out here. In this way it is possible to retain 90-95% of the ash. The remaining
dust may be removed by adding a hot-gas filter operating above the tar dew-point.

The char reactor is a bubbling bed reactor, where the char is gasified at approximately 730°C using
mainly air.

5
Another supplier is the Finnish company Metso, who supplies biomass gasifiers up to 150 MJ/s.

198
Figure 1: Process diagram (ref. 2).

Input
Low grade biomass.
Steam from the power plant‟s steam cycle.

Output
Synthetic gas (syngas)

The lower heating value of the wet gas is 5.9 MJ/kg, while the higher heating value is 7.6 MJ/Nm3 (ref.
2).

Typical capacities
Nothing is yet typical, but two application areas are considered (ref. 2):
Utility scale at 50-150 MJ/s (syngas)
Industrial scale at 10-20 MJ/s

Advantages/disadvantages
Fuel flexibility: A large variety of difficult and low value fuels can be gasified, while not
compromising a stable and reliable production of combustible gas.

Easy gas cleaning: Ash components such as potassium (K) and phosphorous (P) can be efficiently
separated.

199
Recycling of nutrients: By keeping especially K and P in the non-sintered ash, it is possible to recycle
these valuable nutrients to agriculture. Furthermore, a low content of heavy polyaromates (PAH) often
allow the ash to be returned directly to e.g. farm land.

Scalability: The low temperature gasifier is based on CFB technology and thus fully scalable allowing
great flexibility for adapting it to different uses.

Examples of best available technology


The Low Temperature Circulating Fluidized Bed (LT-CFB) process was invented by Peder Stoholm,
Danish Fluid Bed Technologies (DFBT), in the 1990's. In 2009 DONG Energy acquired DFBT's rights
and related knowhow, and renamed the technology Pyroneer.

A 6 MW Low Temperature Gasifier is constructed and commissioned at the DONG Energy owned
coal-fired Asnaes Power Plant, unit 2. The demonstration will primarily gasify straw, 1.5 tonnes per
hour, yielding 2,000 m3/hour of syngas (6 MJ/s). Several other fuels is however also expected to be
gasifed, in order to demonstrate the fuel flexibility. This demonstration project is expected to be
completed 2013-14. A commercial scale demo-plant of 50 – 100 MJ/s is presently being investigated,
and is expected to be commissioned in 2015 (ref. 2).

Environment
In general all the char is converted in the char reactor as previously described. A minor part of the Char
will however escape from the 1st cyclone and afterwards be retained in the 2nd cyclone and then end up
in the fly ash, or it will also escape the 2nd cyclone and be combusted with the gas in the coal boiler.
Due to the high efficiency of the gasifier concept, the amount of char escaping the 1st cyclone will be
very limited.

The ash, which contains all the alkaline salts present in the biomass and some char, will be distributed
on farmland as a fertiliser.

Additional remarks
Main consumption figures for a 50 MJ/s gasfifier (ref. 2):
Fuel, straw : 12.4 tonnes/hr
Gasification air : 11.9 tonnes/hr
Steam : 0.9 tonnes/hr
Sand, bed material : 0.2 tonnes/hr
Electrical power : 750 kW

References
1. “LTCFB demonstration plant”, ForskEL project no. 2009-10267, DONG Energy, September 2010.
2. DONG Energy, November 2011.

200
Data sheet

Technology Biomass gasifier, pre-gasifier for boilers


2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generation capacity for one unit 100 100 100 100 1
(MJ/s syngas)
Efficiency, fuel to gas (%) 95 95 95 95 1
Avalability (%)
Technical lifetime (years) 25 25 25 25 1
Construction time (years) 2 2 2 2 1
Environment
NOX (g per GJ fuel) A
CH4 (g per GJ fuel)
N2O (g per GJ fuel)
Financial data
Specific investment costs (M€ per 0,5 0,4 0,3 0,3 1
MJ/s fuel)
Total O&M (€ per MWh fuel) 2.4 2.4 2.4 2.4 B 1

References:
1 DONG Energy, November 2011
Notes:
A Depends on how the gas afterwards is combusted, but most likely similar to coal combustion, cf.
Technology element 01.
B Exclusive fuel

201
84 GASIFIER, BIOMASS, UPDRAFT

Brief technology description


A solid biomass fuel is converted into gas, which in turn is used in boilers, gas engines, Stirling engines
or gas turbines for power and heat production, or as substitute for fossil fuels in industrial processes.

The biomass is converted through several stages. Up to 100 C the water is vaporized. By pyrolysis
(extra heating and limited addition of oxygen) the dry fuel is converted to a tarry gas and a coke
residue. Subsequently, the coke residue is gasified at 800-1200 C, while water vapour and/or oxygen
(air) is added. Depending on the process, the tar shall either be incinerated or cracked before it is
cleaned of particles etc.

The updraft (or counter current) gasifier is characterised by the fuel and the gas having opposite flow
directions. The gas has low temperature (~75oC) but a large content of tar, typically 30-100g/Nm3. The
updraft gasifier has been used for the last 75-100 years for electricity, heat, steam and industrial
processes such as burning of ceramics, glass making, drying and town gas (ref. 2).

The raw gas leaving the gasifier is often called producer gas, while gas, which has been cleaned from
impurities, is called syngas (brief from synthetic gas).

Input
Wood chips, pellets, chunks and briquettes, industrial wood residues, demolition wood and energy
crops can be used. Requirements to moisture content and size of the fuel are depending on the design of
the reactor and the process.

Output
Producer gas primarily consists of the components CH4, H2, CO, CO2, N2, H2O and tar with a lower
heating value of 6.6 – 6.8 MJ/Nm3 for the dry cleaned gas (ref. 2).

Typical capacities
0.2 - 10 MJ/s fuel.

Since the economy-of-scale is moderate, this gasifier is well suited for modular plants. Each module
can then be tailored to a specific fuel.

Regulation ability
At Harboøre tests have shown that the load can be changed from 10 to 100 % and vice versa within a
few minutes, which is not possible in a conventional wood chip boiler (ref. 2).

Advantages/disadvantages
The updraft gasifier has limited requirements to fuel quality, i.e. the contents of moisture and ash.
Furthermore, the gasifier is capable of ramping up and down thereby offering flexibility both in relation
to industrial applications and for supplying heat to district heating grids.

202
Environment
The electricity efficiency is higher than combustion technologies, in the low capacity range. Thus,
emissions are less - relative to electricity generation.

Research, development and demonstration


The Danish development activities for smaller gasification plants focus on a few development tracks.
Priority is to conduct long-term tests in pilot size and demonstration of few technologies. In connection
with this R&D is carried out, which is expected to solve operational problems such as corrosion,
process regulation etc.

The main issues to be addressed to achieve market deployment of biomass gasification include:
Ability to handle a wider range of fuel properties in particular waste wood and other biomass
residues.
Establishing references of up-draft gasification plants for waste wood and other biomass
residues to drive the incremental development and facilitate export of Danish technology.
Other issues that should be addressed to support biomass gasification:
Purification of wastewater with tar in; in particular capital cost reduction
Meeting emissions regulations
Reactor calculations; kinetic models of significance for design and control

The counter current gasification technology is ready for a broader market introduction.

Examples of best available technology


Examples of gasifiers based on Danish technologies:
At Harboøre a 3.6 MJ/s updraft counter-current moving bed gasifier was installed in 1994. The
gasifier is used for CHP production and has a gross electrical output of 1.0 MW. The gasifier
utilises woodchips. The gasifier is operated by Babcock & Wilcox Volund A/S.
In Japan three counter-current moving bed gasifiers have been installed in 2007-09 with
capacities ranging from 8 to 11 MJ/s. The plants were installed by JFE corporation based on a
license from Babcock & Wilcox Volund A/S (ref. 2).
Some counter-current fixed bed gasifiers producing gas to Stirling engines were commissioned
in Denmark during 2009, cf. Technology sheet 10.

Notably USA, Denmark, Germany, Sweden, Austria, and Finland are involved in developing biomass
gasification processes. The European Commission framework programmes for R&D support
gasification as well as national programmes in a number of countries.

References
1. ”Biomasse kraftvarme udviklingskortlægning” (R&D mapping of biomass cogeneration; in
Danish). Summary report. Eltra, Elkraft System, and Danish Energy Agency, 2003
2. Babcock and Wilcox Volund (BWV), November 2009.

203
3. ”Strategi for forskning, udvikling og demonstration af biomasseteknologi til el- og
kraftvarmeproduktion i Danmark” (Strategy for RD&D in biomass cogeneration in Denmark; in
Danish). Danish Energy Agency, Elkraft System og Eltra, 2003.
4. ”El från nya anläggningar – Jämförelse mellen olika tekniker för elgenerering med avseende på
kostnader och utvecklingstendenser” (Benchmarking of new electricity generating technologies;
in Swedish). Bärring et al. Elforsk Report no. 00:01. 2000.

204
Data sheet

Technology Updraft counter-current fixed bed gasifier


with CHP plant (engine)
2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref
Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit (MW) 1.4 1
Total efficiency (%) net 105 A 1
Electricity efficiency (%) gross 26-27 5
Electricity efficiency (%) net
Time for varm start-up (hours) 0.25 3
Forced outage (%) 5 2
Planned outage (weeks per year) 3 2
Technical lifetime (years) 20 2
Construction time (years) 1.5 2
Environment
SO2 (degree of desulphoring, %)
NOX (g per GJ fuel) 100 2
CH4 (g per GJ fuel) 20 2
N2O (g per GJ fuel) 2
Financial data
Specific investment (M€/MW) 3.7 B 2
Fixed O&M (€/MW/year) 185000 B 2
Variable O&M (€/MWh) 19 B 2
Regulation ability
Fast reserve (MW per 15 minutes) 1.4 2
Minimum load (% of full load) 10% 2

References:
1 Danish Energy Agency, 2003.
2 Bjørn Teislev, R&D Manager, Babcock and Wilcox Volund (BWV), personal communication,
2003
3 Danish Technology Institute: "Udvikling af computerbaseret værktøj, energyPRO, til simulering
og optimering af driftsstrategi for biobrændselsfyrede kraftvarmeværker", September 2001
5 Babcock and Wilcox Volund, 2009.
Notes:
A 105% efficiency is with flue-gas condensation (e.g. wood chips as fuel); without the efficiency is
around 85%
B Cost data are the same as in the 2005 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2002 to
2011 by multiplying with a general inflation factor 1.2306

205
85 GASIFIERS, BIOMASS, STAGED DOWN-DRAFT

Brief technology description


A solid biomass fuel is converted into gas (producer gas), which can be used in gas engines, boilers,
gas turbines or fuel cells for power and heat production. The data in this technology sheet are for a
system including a gas engine.

The biomass is converted through several stages. Up to 100 C the water is vaporized. By pyrolysis the
dry fuel is converted to a tarry gas and a char residue. Subsequently, the char residue is gasified at 800-
1200 C, while water vapour and/or oxygen (air) is added.

In staged gasification, pyrolysis and gasification are separated into two reactors, enabling a partial
oxidisation of tar products between the stages. Thus, staged gasifiers are producing a gas with low tar
content, which is essential for engine operation. The tar content is often below 100 mg/Nm3 and can be
below 10 mg/Nm3.

The pyrolysis process can be with either internal or external heating. Internal heating is performed by
addition of air/oxygen, while external heating utilises waste heat from the produced gas and from the
engine to dry and pyrolyse the fuel. The data in the table are valid for external heating, as this results in
higher efficiencies.

Input
Wood chips (collected in forests), industrial wood residues, straw and energy crops can be used in the
form of chips, briquettes or pellets. Requirements to moisture content and size of the fuel are depending
on the design of the reactor and the process.

Output
Producer gas primarily consists of the components N2, H2, CO, CO2, CH4, and water. The lower
heating value of the gas is 4.5-6.5 MJ/Nm3. The gas is converted to electricity and heat by a gas engine.

Typical capacities
The attractive market segment is for plants with fuel inputs around 1-20 MJ/s.
The economy-of-scale is important.

Regulation ability
It can be fully regulated within a few seconds.

Advantages/disadvantages compared to other technologies


Gasification of biomass for use in decentralized combined heat and power production can decrease the
emission level compared to power production with direct combustion and a steam cycle.

206
Existing natural gas fuelled engines can be converted to use 100% producer gas or a combination of
producer gas and natural gas.

One disadvantage is long start-up time (from cold). Also, excessive soot-formation may occur at
start/stop.

Environment:
Ashes from gasification of wood contain most of the cadmium that was in the wood. Therefore,
spreading of ashes in forests or on agricultural land shall be carried out with considerable caution.

Research and development¨


Scale up
Load regulation; incl. automatic start/stop
Further automation and safety documentation
Optimised engine operation
Low temperature corrosion; materials
Soot formation

Examples of best available technology


1) The company Weiss (www.weiss-as.dk) established in 2009 a 500 kW demonstration plant
(fully automated) in Hadsund, Denmark.
2) Bio Synergi (www.biosynergi.dk): The Græsted pilot project (450 kJ/s fuel).

207
Data sheet:

Technology Gasifiers, biomass, staged down-draft

2015 2020 2030 2050 Note Ref


Energy/technical data
Generating capacity for one unit (MW) 1-10 1-20 1-20 1

Total efficiency (%) net 103 105 105 A 1


Electricity efficiency (%) net - 100% load 35 - 40 37 - 45 37 - 45 A 1
Start-up fuel consumption (GJ)
Cb coefficient (40 oC/80 oC) 0.6 0.7 0.7 1
Availability (%) 95 97 97 1
Technical lifetime (years) 15 - 20 20 20 1
Construction time (years) 1 1 1 1
Environment
SO2 (degree of desulphurisation, %)
SO2 (g per GJ fuel) 0 0 0 1
NOX (g per GJ fuel) 100 100 100 1
CH4 (g per GJ fuel)
N2O (g per GJ fuel)
Financial data
Specific investment (M€/MW) 3.4-3.7 2.5-3.0 2.4-3.0 C+D 1+2
Fixed O&M (€/MW/year) 69000 57000 57000 C 1
Variable O&M (€/MWh) 18 17 17 C 1
Regulation ability
Minimum load (% of full load) 10 10 10 1

References:
1 Weiss A/S and Biomass Gasification Group, Technical University of Denmark, November 2009.
2 TK Energi, November 2004
3 "Potential contribution of bioenergy to the World's future energy demand", International Energy
Agency, 2007.
Notes:
A With external heating of the pyrolysis process through waste heat recovery
B Calculated from < 1 mg/m³ assuming this value refers to dry flue gas at 6% oxygen
C Cost data are the same as in the 2005 catalogue, however inflated from price level 2002 to 2011 by
multiplying with a general inflation factor 1.2306
D Ref. 3 quotes a price of 1000-3000 €/kW (2006) for small (0.1-1 MW) gasification plants, no mention
of specific technology. This translates to 1.1-3.2 M€/MW in 2008 prices.

208
ANNEX 1: FEATURES OF STEAM EXTRACTION TURBINES
With an extraction steam turbine, all steam may be condensed (e.g. by sea water) to generate maximum
electricity (PC), or all steam may be extracted to be condensed at a higher temperature to generate
district heat (QB). In the latter case, full back-pressure mode (point B in the below figure), some
electricity generation is lost (PC – PB).

Power

C
PC Cv
MC
PB B

Cb

Heat

QMC QB

With the steam boiler at full capacity, the turbine may be operated at all points along the line C-B. In
the real world, C-B may not be a straight line, but a linear relationship is a good proxy.

By varying full input and steam extraction, the generation of electricity and heat may in theory be
varied within the area limited by lines C-B and origo-B. However, in practice there is a minimum
power generation capacity (e.g. 10-20% of PC), and the maximum heat generation capacity may be
lower than QB.

Below, some relationships are given for key variables.

PC: Power capacity in full condensation mode; point C. No heat production.

209
: Electricity efficiency in full condensation mode.

QB: Heat capacity in full back-pressure mode (no low-pressure condensation); point B.

PB: Power capacity in full back-pressure mode.

QMC: Heat capacity at minimum low-pressure condensation; point MC.

cv: Loss of electricity generation per unit of heat generated at fixed fuel input; assumed constant.

cb: Back-pressure coefficient (electricity divided by heat); assumed constant.

The fuel consumption H for any given combination of power generation (P) and heat generation (Q):

: Electricity efficiency in full back-pressure mode:

: Heat efficiency in full back-pressure mode:

: Total efficiency (electricity plus heat) in full back-pressure mode:

: Electricity efficiency at minimum low-pressure condensation:

: Heat efficiency at minimum low-pressure condensation:

: Total efficiency (electricity plus heat) at minimum low-pressure condensation:

210
Example:

Electricity efficiency in full condensation mode = 45%, cv = 0.15, cb = 1 and QMC/QB = 0.7.

This gives the following values in point B:


Electricity efficiency = 39.1%
Heat efficiency = 39.1%
Total efficiency = 78.3%

While in point MC:


Electricity efficiency = 40.9%
Heat efficiency = 27.4%
Total efficiency = 68.3%

211

You might also like